Samsung Cell Phone 4G LTE SMARTPHONE User Guide

4 G  
L T E  
S M A R T P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability  
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE  
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND  
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR  
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR  
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
Modification of Software  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR  
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.  
IF YOUR CARRIER PROHIBITS THIS, IF YOU ATTEMPT TO DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE ONTO THE DEVICE WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION,  
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED ON THE SCREEN THAT UNAUTHORIZED SOFTWARE HAS BEEN DETECTED. YOU SHOULD THEN POWER  
DOWN THE DEVICE AND CONTACT YOUR CARRIER TO RESTORE THE DEVICE TO THE CARRIER AUTHORIZED SETTINGS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)  
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own  
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field  
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the  
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as  
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network  
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more  
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe  
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE  
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND  
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™  
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO  
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In  
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other  
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,  
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole  
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security  
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited  
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™  
devices are sold. [101212]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC  
Headquarters:  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, TX 75082  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Internet Address:  
©2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS  
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support.  
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default  
applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device.  
Nuance®, VSuite, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,  
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
LTE is a trademark of ETSI.  
and  
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license  
from SRS Labs, Inc.  
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and  
software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap Apps >  
Settings >  
More > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more  
information on how to complete your registration.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google  
Hangouts, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make  
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is  
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices  
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be  
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available  
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other  
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the  
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be  
used and protected.  
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or  
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These  
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.  
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to  
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be  
heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your  
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.  
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise •  
from both ends of a call.  
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.  
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,  
without worrying about surrounding noise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address  
Book .......................................................... 55  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10: Health and Safety  
Section 12: Samsung Product  
Information ..............................................198  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Registration ............................................ 235  
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to start using your phone by first  
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then  
setting up your voice mail.  
2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.  
Setting Up Your Phone  
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM  
into their corresponding internal compartments. The  
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal  
area.  
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into  
the slot on the top of your phone (1).  
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.  
Doing so may damage the cover.  
Installing the SIM Card  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided  
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,  
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many  
others features.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts  
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,  
so be careful when handling, inserting, or  
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not  
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot  
if the SIM is not detected.  
Installing the Battery  
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket  
(as shown) until the card locks into place.  
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone  
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned  
as shown.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
   
Removing and Installing the Memory Card  
You can use a microSD(SD) or microSDHCcard to  
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure  
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and  
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory  
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other  
devices.  
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB  
Correct  
memory card.  
Installing the Memory Card  
Incorrect  
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”  
Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as  
shown).  
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and  
the card is securely inserted.  
Removing the Memory Card  
1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.  
2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you  
Installing the Back Cover  
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)  
and press down (2).  
have a secure seal.  
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before  
switching on the phone.  
Charging a Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The  
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included  
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and  
chargers.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
     
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your  
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges  
fully in approximately 4 hours.  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate  
mode, web browser use, and other variables may  
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Although you can use the phone while the battery is  
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.  
Correct  
Using the Travel Charger  
Incorrect  
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to  
connection. If the battery is not properly installed  
and the wall charger is connected, the handset  
may power off and on continuously, preventing  
proper operation.  
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/  
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a  
standard AC wall outlet.  
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from  
the interface connector jack on the phone.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can also choose to display a percentage value. Having a  
percentage value on-screen can provide a better idea of the  
remaining charge on the battery.  
Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please  
note that a touch screen responds best to a light  
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive  
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch  
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device Display Show battery percentage.  
Switching the Phone On or Off  
1. Press and hold  
until the phone switches  
on.  
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the  
battery, can cause damage to the phone.  
Low Battery Indicator  
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a  
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your  
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning  
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a  
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery  
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your  
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone  
automatically turns off.  
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the  
phone.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
           
Configuring your Phone  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.  
To change the language, use the Language menu. For  
When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a  
few things.  
1. The Welcome to AT&T Ready2Go! screen displays. The  
default language for your phone is English. If you would  
like to select another language, tap English and scroll  
up or down to select one of the listed languages.  
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold  
until the Device options screen displays.  
4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone.  
,
2. Tap the Accessibility box at the bottom of the screen to  
modify any of the Accessibility function if you desire.  
5. At the Power off prompt, tap OK  
.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch  
Screen  
3. Tap Next and follow the instructions on each screen to  
set up your phone.  
1. Press  
to lock the touch screen.  
2. Press  
again to display the lock screen  
Creating a New Google Account  
then swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.  
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will  
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your  
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will  
always be in sync between your phone and computer.  
Note: Swipe is the default screen locking method. To change  
If you did not create a new account during the setup  
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these  
steps:  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to create and  
activate your account.  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap  
.
– or –  
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a  
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to  
sign in and add the account to your phone.  
greeting, and record your name.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google  
Note: These steps may be different depending on your  
Account.  
network.  
Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need  
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
to sign in.  
, then tap  
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
Creating a Samsung Account  
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the  
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing  
applications such as ChatON and Samsung Hub. If you did  
not create a Samsung account when you first set up your  
phone, follow these steps:  
voice mail center.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
1. From the home screen, tap  
Accounts Add account  
Samsung account  
3. Tap Create new account  
Settings  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the  
asterisk key on the phone you are using.  
3. Enter your password.  
.
2. Tap  
.
.
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
             
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines some key features of your phone and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone  
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and  
provides information on using a memory card.  
Smart Remote using WatchON  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
Delivers data faster using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access  
Plus (HSPA+)  
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your phone.  
Up to 64GB expandable memory slot  
Corporate and Personal Email  
Sync and update social network applications  
Thousands of Apps available to download via Google Play Store™  
and Samsung Hub  
LTE network (5-6 bands) with 1.9 gigahertz quad-core processor  
Android v 4.4.2, KitKat Platform  
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,  
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)  
Brilliant 4.99” Full HD Super AMOLED display  
Galaxy Gear™ compliant. For more information, please visit:  
Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see  
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and  
Instant Messaging with Google Hangouts™  
Video with Full HD 1080p recording and playback  
Samsung Link to share your media content across DLNA certified  
devices  
Ready access to the Internet  
®
Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi technology  
Mobile Hotspot and USB Tethering capability  
13 Megapixel camera and camcorder with Front Facing camera  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Light (RGB) Sensor: lets you use the ambient light level  
to adjust the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor  
decreases screen brightness in dim light.  
Front View of Your Phone  
1
2
3
14  
13  
12  
3. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.  
4. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your  
favorite applications on the Home screen.  
5. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important  
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,  
6. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with  
additional options for different features and  
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,  
Messaging, and Web.  
11  
10  
4
5
9
7. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home  
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold  
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google  
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice  
application.  
6
7
8
1. Status light: displays red when charging or the battery  
is low, blue when a notification has arrived or you are  
voice recording, and green when fully charged.  
8. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating  
a menu or web page.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
     
9. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is  
presently displayed.  
Side Views of Your Phone  
1
7
6
10. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search  
that allows you to search for items on the internet.  
11. Weather widget: displays Time, Day, Date,  
Temperature and weather conditions for your area.  
12. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to  
operate your phone, such as the received signal  
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,  
missed calls, etc.  
2
5
13. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of  
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to  
Self shot.  
14. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light  
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is  
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to  
your ear, the touch screen will turn off.  
3
4
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.  
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume  
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume  
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly  
7. Microphone: used for noise cancellation and stereo  
recording.  
Rear View of Your Phone  
press down either volume key (  
the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a  
message.  
) to mute  
1
3
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you  
are speaking to them. It is also used for the  
Speakerphone.  
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to  
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories  
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
2
5. Power/Lock key: (  
) lets you power your  
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the  
touch screen. For more information on locking your  
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.  
2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the  
Speakerphone is turned on.  
6. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared signals used for  
controlling external devices.  
3. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking  
pictures in dark places.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
     
Display Layout  
Displays when there is a system error or alert.  
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about  
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access  
Displays to indicate a security warning. You are  
prompted to set a screen lock password.  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
Indicator Icons  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s  
display and Indicator area:  
Displays when a call is on hold.  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater  
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Displays when the speakerphone is on.  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You  
cannot send or receive any calls or access online  
information.  
Displays when a call has been missed.  
Displays when a call has been muted.  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
Displays when there is no network available.  
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.  
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is  
fully charged.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the 4G LTE network.  
Displays when your battery is charging. Also  
displays battery charge level.  
Displays when your phone is downloading or has  
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is  
installing.  
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in  
progress.  
Device Power Low – Shows your current battery  
charge level.  
DevicePowerCriticalShowsyourcurrentbattery  
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and  
will soon shutdown.  
Displays when a Play Store download has  
completed.  
DisplayswhenyourconnectiontoanEDGEnetwork  
is active.  
Displays when updates are available for download.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the EDGE network.  
Displays when the phone is connected to a  
computer via a supported USB cable connection.  
Displayswhenyourconnectionto aUTMS, HSDPA,  
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.  
Displays when the phone is tethered via a  
supported USB cable connection.  
Displays when a new text or multimedia message  
is received.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.  
Displays when a new voice mail is received.  
Displayswhenyourconnectiontoa4GLTEnetwork  
is active.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Displays when Email is received.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays in the notifications window when there  
is a new Gmail message.  
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point  
available but you are not connected to it. May also  
display if there is a communication issue with the  
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Displayswhenthetime anddateforaCalendarEvent  
DisplayswhenWi-FiDirectisactiveandyourphone  
is connected to another device.  
Displayswhenyousetanalarmtoringataspecified  
Displays when your phone as been configured as a  
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.  
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.  
Displays whenGPSisactiveandacquiringa signal.  
Displays when data synchronization and  
application sync is active and synchronization is in  
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.  
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired  
with the phone.  
Displays when Near Field Communication (NFC)  
has been activated.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Google Search Bar  
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet  
search engine powered by Google™.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap the Google Search  
Displayswhenyourdeviceisconnectedbeingused  
to control streaming media and is connected to a  
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified  
device using the Samsung Link application.  
bar  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want  
to search for, then tap  
3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. Follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
.
Displays when your device is currently sharing/  
streaming media to a paired device using the  
Samsung Link application.  
.
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.  
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.  
Displays when the keypad is active.  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
 
Terms used in this user manual  
Tap  
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
Menu Navigation  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and  
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available  
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home  
screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.  
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Tap a menu item to select it.  
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Command Keys  
Menu Key  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For  
example:  
Press  
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of  
options for the current screen or feature.  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Home Key  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Press  
Home to display the main Home screen. Press  
Swipe and Palm Swipe  
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. Use swipe when:  
and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task  
manager.  
Back Key  
Unlocking the screen  
Press  
step.  
Back to return to the previous screen, option or  
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu  
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally  
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:  
Capturing the screen  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Panning  
Using Motions and Gestures  
By activating the various motion and gesture features, you  
can access a variety of time saving functions.  
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device  
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must  
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to  
another page.  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
motions, tap  
Apps  
Settings  
My  
My device  
Tilt  
device Motions and gestures. When tapped, each  
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the  
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or  
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:  
entry comes with an on-screen tutorial.  
• Air gesture: Allows you to control your device by performing  
motions above the sensor (without touching the device).  
• Motion: Allows you to control your device using natural  
movements (on the screen).  
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.  
Turn over  
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For  
example:  
• Palm motion: Allows you to control your device by touching the  
screen with your entire hand.  
Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone  
over.  
To activate Air gesture:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device  
Air gesture  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Air gesture  
and then tap  
Motions and gestures  
My device  
.
to turn it on  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The Air gesture icon  
will appear in the status bar.  
4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each  
feature to turn it on  
.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
To activate Palm Motion:  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device  
and then tap  
Motions and gestures.  
can be activated.  
My device  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion  
4. Tap Learn about the sensor and icon field to review  
on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor  
and related icon.  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
5. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm  
feature to turn it on  
To activate Motion:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Motion to  
turn it on  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
motion can be activated.  
4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each  
and then tap  
Motions and gestures.  
feature to turn it on  
.
My device  
.
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
.
To unlock your phone:  
1. Press the lock button  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Motion can  
located on the upper  
be activated.  
right side of your phone.  
2. The lock screen will display with Swipe screen to  
unlock displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.  
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.  
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application  
Menus:  
4. The Home screen will be displayed.  
Note: There are several additional ways you can lock your  
1. At the Home screen, tap  
. The first Application  
Menu will be displayed.  
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two  
menus.  
Home Screen Overview  
The main home screen is the starting point for many  
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items  
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets  
to give you instant access to information and applications.  
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by  
3. Tap one of the application icons.  
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application  
menus that you have available will increase.  
pressing  
.
Navigating Using Sub-Menus  
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen  
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,  
Contacts, Messaging, or Internet.  
Navigating Through the Home Screens  
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can  
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place  
different applications on each of the home screens.  
To access a sub-menu:  
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with  
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen  
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each  
side.  
1. Press  
.
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone  
screen.  
2. Tap an option.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Accessing Recently-Used Apps  
Activating and Deactivating Multi window  
There are two different ways you can activate and deactivate  
1. Press and hold  
from any screen to open the  
recently-used applications window.  
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.  
– or –  
the Multi window feature:  
To activate Multi window via the Notification screen:  
1. In a single motion, touch the Status bar to reveal the  
Notifications tab, and then drag it to the bottom of the  
screen to open the Notifications screen.  
Tap  
to go to the Task manager.  
– or –  
Tap  
2. Swipe the row of icons to the left until the  
Multi window icon is displayed.  
to go to Google Search.  
– or –  
Tap  
3. Tap the Multi window entry to activate the feature. The  
icon turns green when active.  
to delete the record of all recently used  
applications.  
4. Tap Home  
to return to the Home screen.  
5. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing  
Using the Multi Window  
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the  
current screen at the same time.  
all the available Multi window apps.  
Note: Once you have turned the Multi window option on in  
step 3, you only need to press and hold the Back key  
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel  
can be active atop another current application on the  
screen.  
(
) to re-activate the Multi window feature.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To activate Multi window via the Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
My device Display  
To move the tab:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for  
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its  
new location along the current screen edge.  
My device  
.
2. Tap Multi window to create a checkmark and turn the  
feature on.  
3. Tap Home  
to return to the Home screen.  
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you  
4. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing  
can’t get to a button or option behind it.  
all the available Multi window apps.  
To deactivate Multi window:  
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
Press and hold the Back key (  
). This action hides  
the Multi window tab from view.  
Repositioning the Multi Window  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for  
approximately one-second to detach it from the  
screen, then slowly drag it to its new location along  
either side.  
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps  
panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.  
The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be  
relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen  
(top/bottom/left/right).  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
   
To edit a Multi window application:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
Customizing the Multi Window apps  
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi  
window can be organized by either being rearranged or  
removed.  
To rearrange the Multi window applications:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
3. Tap  
More  
Edit (located at the bottom of  
the list) to reveal a staging area (on the right) that can  
house any removed applications from the Multi  
window panel.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it  
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new  
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off  
the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new  
location.  
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal  
process.  
To remove a Multi window application:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
More - access to additional functions  
3. Tap  
More  
Edit button (located at the  
Create - create a user-defined custom  
bottom of the list) to reveal a staging area that can  
house any removed applications from the Multi  
window panel.  
Create  
Multi window (paired window)  
Edit - edit the available Multi window apps  
Edit  
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal  
process.  
Help - access to Help information  
Help  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To restore a Multi window application:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
Note: Only applications found within the Multi-window panel  
can be active atop another current application on the  
screen.  
When launching applications that contain multimedia  
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played  
simultaneously.  
3. Tap  
More  
Edit located at the bottom of  
the list) to reveal the staging area containing any  
previously removed apps.  
4. Locate the desired application.  
App #1  
Border  
Bar  
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it  
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it  
to a new location in the current list of apps.  
Switch  
application  
Close  
application  
Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the  
same screen  
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be  
run at the same time as a current on-screen app.  
Switch  
Fullscreen  
window  
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can  
then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a  
desired app.  
App #2  
Drag and  
drop content  
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and  
Maps applications.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
   
1. Launch an application such as Internet.  
2. Activate the Multi window feature.  
4. Scroll through the list of applications you already have  
open and tap the one you wish.  
The new application replaces the old one.  
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.  
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it  
detaches from the panel.  
To switch windows: (swap the locations)  
1. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).  
2. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap  
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and  
drop the new Multi window app over either the top or  
bottom area of the current on-screen app.  
the Border button  
functions.  
to show the on-screen  
3. Locate and tap  
Switch window. The location of  
Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a  
split screen view containing both the initial app and the  
new Multi window app. Each application is still  
independent of the other.  
the current apps are switched.  
To drag and drop content:  
You can drag and drop text and images in selected  
applications.  
To switch applications:  
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap  
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.  
1. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom) that  
you would like to switch out with another application.  
2. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap  
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.  
3. Locate and tap  
Drag and drop content.  
the Border button  
functions.  
to show the on-screen  
4. Drag text or images from one app and drop them in the  
other app.  
3. Locate and tap  
Switch application  
.
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If an application does not support Drag and drop, then  
Customizing Your Home Screen  
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
Not supported is displayed.  
Creating Shortcuts  
To close a selected application:  
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap  
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.  
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu  
Creating Application Folders  
Changing the Wallpaper  
3. Locate and tap  
Close application. The current app  
is closed and the remaining app is maximized.  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
Moving Home Screens  
To increase the size of a desired application window:  
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen,  
locate the Border bar indicating the edge of the app  
window.  
Creating Shortcuts  
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen  
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a  
feature, action, or launch an application.  
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then  
drag it to resize the desired window.  
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must  
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the  
new screen, then add the shortcut.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
       
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu  
Deleting a shortcut  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it  
from its location on the current screen.  
3. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon  
and release it.  
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired  
application.  
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items  
turn red.  
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an  
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the  
Apps tab.  
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes  
it from the current screen.  
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current page. Once complete, release the screen to  
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the  
current screen.  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the  
exception of the Apps  
shortcut.  
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to  
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home  
screen.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.  
4. Tap Apps and widgets Folder, or Page.  
,
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you  
want to add as the new primary short cut.  
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the  
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.  
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and  
position it on the current screen.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home  
screens.  
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn  
red.  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just  
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either  
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.  
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen  
application.  
removes it from the current Home screen.  
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
Adding a Widget  
1. Press  
2. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
to activate the main Home screen.  
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
already selected.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
4. Press  
and tap View type.  
4. Tap Apps and widgets  
.
5. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next  
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.  
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the  
current screen, then release the Widget.  
Removing a Widget  
to the option.  
6. Press  
and tap Edit.  
7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to  
move.  
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around  
8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.  
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge  
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.  
on the screen.  
2. Drag the Widget up to the Remove icon  
and  
release it.  
9. Tap Save  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
10. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
Changing the Wallpaper  
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home  
screens by following these steps:  
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty  
area of the screen.  
Creating Application Folders  
You can create application folders to hold similar applications  
if you wish.  
To create a folder follow these steps:  
The Home screen window is displayed.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
to display your current applications.  
2. Tap  
2. Tap Set wallpaper  
3. Select the location where you would like to change the  
wallpaper. Tap Home screen Lock screen, or Home and  
lock screens  
.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not  
already selected.  
,
.
4. Press  
and tap Edit.  
4. Tap one of the following options:  
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken  
with your camera.  
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like  
to move to a folder.  
6. Drag the icon up to the Create folder  
7. Enter a folder name and tap OK  
icon.  
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is  
not available for the Lock screen option.  
.
A folder is displayed in the original place of the  
application icon with the application icon displayed on  
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.  
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.  
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper  
,
Done, or  
Cancel  
.
8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to  
the App info  
application.  
icon to view information on the  
9. Tap Save  
34  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise  
tap Cancel  
7. Press  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to  
seven Home screens.  
.
to return to the main Home screen.  
To add a new Home screen:  
Moving Home Screens  
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you  
want.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
2. Press  
.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains  
.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:  
A new screen is added.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
2. Press  
.
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to  
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.  
a different location.  
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.  
5. Press  
You can now add items to your new Home screen.  
To delete a Home screen:  
to return to the main Home screen.  
When you move a Home screen, the other Home  
screens are re-ordered automatically.  
5. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
Notification Bar  
2. Press  
.
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show  
information about processes that are running, recent  
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:  
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.  
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the top of the screen.  
The page will turn red.  
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
vertically.  
5. If there are items on the Home screen, the Remove  
home screen page prompt is displayed.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
   
2. Tap  
then locate the Notifications panel area  
Clearing Notifications  
located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function  
from the bottom two rows and then drag it to the top  
two rows. Additional functions are S Beam, NFC, Air  
view, Air gesture, Hands-free mode, Smart stay, Smart  
pause, Smart scroll, Sync, and Airplane mode.  
4. Tap Brightness adjustment to create a checkmark if you  
want to be able to adjust the screen brightness via the  
Notification panel.  
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:  
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
vertically.  
2. Tap the Clear button.  
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.  
Accessing Additional Panel Functions  
In addition to notifications, the Notification panel also  
provides quick and ready access to separate device  
functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by  
toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that  
will be displayed.  
5. Tap  
and then tap  
to display only your primary  
functions.  
Memory Card  
1. From the notification panel, tap  
to display  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHC  
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital  
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data  
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the  
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The  
device has a USB SD card mode.  
additional options.  
The following functions (default) are located in the top  
two rows and can either be activated (green) or  
deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS, Sound, Screen rotation,  
Bluetooth, Reading mode, Blocking mode, Power  
saving, Multi window, and Screen Mirroring.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Mounting the SD Card  
SD card Available Memory Status  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other  
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to  
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection  
with your computer.  
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Storage  
Settings  
.
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays  
under the Total space and Available space headings.  
Erasing Files from the SD card  
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,  
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available  
information on it.  
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to  
the SD card while removing it from the slot.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Storage  
2. Tap Format SD card  
3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format  
SD card  
Settings  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Storage  
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD  
card  
3. Tap OK  
Settings  
.
.
.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on  
.
the SD card.  
4. Tap Delete all to format or press  
to cancel.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
   
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard  
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keypad will display.  
Entering Text  
This section describes how to select the desired text input  
method when entering characters into your phone. This  
section also describes the predictive text entry system that  
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering  
text.  
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that  
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or  
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when  
entering text.  
Shift  
Key  
Delete  
Key  
Text Input Methods  
There are three text input methods available:  
Google voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.  
Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen  
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and  
landscape orientation.  
Voice Typing  
and More Options  
New  
Paragraph  
Space Bar  
Text Input Mode  
Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead  
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each  
letter of a word.  
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the  
first letter, the shift key ( ) will change to  
and following letters will be lowercase.  
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap  
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad  
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the  
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.  
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc  
.
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,  
symbol, and emoticon keys.  
change to  
in ABC mode. All following letters will  
be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.  
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.  
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift  
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode  
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or  
emoticons.  
(
) key.  
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape  
orientation.  
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen. The following  
Sym mode, the Abc/ABC/abc button will appear.  
screen displays:  
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon  
Using ABC Mode  
characters.  
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a  
Landscape orientation.  
4. Tap the  
button to access additional symbols.  
to return to Abc mode.  
5. Tap  
2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following  
screen displays:  
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
         
Predictive Text  
Entering Text Using Handwriting  
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite  
letters on your screen.  
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter  
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates  
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.  
Predictive text is turned on by default.  
1. Press and hold  
on the keyboard, then tap  
.
1. Press and hold  
on the keyboard, then tap  
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can  
print or use cursive.  
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Predictive text field, to  
3. You can write out your entire message using the  
.
Handwriting feature or tap  
Samsung keyboard mode.  
to switch back to  
3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing  
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of  
the words to replace the word that has already been  
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more  
word choices.  
4. Continue typing your message. Tap  
to send the  
message or press for more options. For more  
Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait  
orientation.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Samsung Keyboard Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Samsung  
Entering Text Using Swype  
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a  
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,  
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error  
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the  
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text  
system.  
UsingtheGoogleVoiceTypingFeature  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google voice  
typing feature.  
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.  
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it  
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.  
1. Tap  
on the keyboard.  
2. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly  
into the microphone.  
3. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has  
timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to  
start again.  
The text is displayed in the message as you are  
speaking.  
4. After you have quit speaking for several seconds, tap  
to return to the keyboard.  
Note: The feature works best when you break your message  
down into smaller segments.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
       
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter  
contractions.  
Enabling and Configuring Swype  
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so  
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard  
setting.  
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a  
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.  
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.  
To enable Swype:  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and  
drag  
down from the Notifications area then tap  
Select input method  
.
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.  
The Swype keyboard is displayed.  
Swype Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Swype  
Swype Text Entry Tips  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video  
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following  
Swype text entry tips.  
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such  
as pp in apple).  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3: Call Functions  
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also  
includes the features and functionality associated with  
making or answering a call.  
Making an International Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then touch and hold  
+
0
. The + character appears.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
area code, and phone number.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
have been deleted.  
until the desired numbers  
Tap  
Settings  
More  
About device  
Status. Your phone number is displayed in the My  
phone number field.  
3. Tap  
to make the call.  
Making a Call  
Manual Pause Dialing  
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in  
your Contacts list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
2. Tap  
to make the call.  
keypad to enter the phone number.  
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call  
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times  
when the person does not answer the call or is already  
2. Press  
to display the dialer sub-menu.  
3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three second pause, and  
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by  
entering multiple three second pauses.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
               
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the  
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a  
key.  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then  
tap  
to make a call.  
5. Tap  
to make the call.  
Making Emergency Calls  
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn  
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message  
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install  
the SIM card.  
Correcting an Entered Number  
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when  
dialing.  
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call  
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.  
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card  
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make  
an emergency call.  
After entering a number using the keypad:  
If you make a mistake, tap  
to erase a single character.  
Press and hold to erase the entire string of numbers.  
Ending a Call  
Tap the  
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap  
. Complete your call. During  
key.  
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker  
mode, Keypad, and End Call features.  
Dialing a Recent Number  
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the  
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address  
Book, the associated name is also displayed.  
3. Tap  
to exit this calling mode.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap the Logs  
tab.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card  
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the  
numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for  
Voicemail.  
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency  
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal  
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.  
5. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen  
displays.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Enter the emergency number (example: 911) and then  
tap  
.
6. Tap a contact to assign to the number. The selected  
contact number will display in the speed dial number  
box.  
.
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will  
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End  
Call features.  
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,  
press  
8. Tap Change order or Remove  
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap  
to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.  
.
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly  
Keypad  
than normal calling mode.  
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial  
number. If the speed dial number is more than 1 digit  
long, enter the first digits, then hold the last digit.  
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
Making a Call from the Address Book  
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the  
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are  
collectively called the Address Book.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
to display  
your Contacts List.  
2. Press  
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
3. Tap Speed dial setting  
.
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
         
Answering a Call  
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the  
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address  
Book.  
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or  
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone  
returns to the previously active function screen.  
1. At the incoming call screen:  
Dialing Options  
Touch and drag  
Touch and drag  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to reject the call and  
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the  
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping  
send it to your voicemail.  
Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the  
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:  
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and  
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.  
Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen  
keypad.  
I’m driving  
Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.  
Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as  
Favorites.  
I’m at the movie theater  
I’m in class  
I’m in a meeting  
Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a  
contact to call.  
Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.  
– or –  
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to contacts option  
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.  
Tap Create new message to compose a new message.  
to end the call.  
2. Tap  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Calling Back a Missed Call  
To call back a missed call number:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call Log  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the  
details of the call.  
Logs  
.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller  
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Logs tab.  
.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller  
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.  
– or –  
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.  
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls  
are identified by the following icons:  
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
Incoming Calls  
Outgoing Calls  
Missed Calls  
Rejected Calls  
Auto Rejected Calls  
:
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
:
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.  
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to  
add the call to your Address Book.  
:
The Create contact screen is displayed.  
:
– or –  
:
If you want to replace the number for an existing  
contact, tap Update existing  
.
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
       
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and  
Delete log entry  
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.  
Add as new  
contact  
Update an existing  
contact  
4. When you are done with your message, tap  
to  
send.  
Call the number  
Send a message  
Deleting a Call from the Call Log  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call  
log.  
4. Enter information into the various fields using the  
keypad.  
3. Tap Delete.  
4. At the Delete log prompt, tap Delete  
.
5. Tap Save to save when you are finished.  
The call is deleted from the Call log.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Adding a Call to the Reject List  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
Sending a Message to a Recent Call  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
List.  
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Tap Add to reject list.  
Options During a Call  
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK  
.
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you  
can use during a call.  
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent  
to your voicemail.  
Adjusting the Call Volume  
During a call, to adjust the volume, use the Volume keys on  
the left side of the phone.  
Call Duration  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Call duration  
Logs  
.
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level  
.
and press the Down volume key to decrease the  
volume level.  
– or –  
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:  
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.  
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.  
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls  
received.  
Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by  
tapping the on-screen Extra volume button  
.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume  
using these same keys.  
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and  
received.  
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing  
then tapping Reset  
.
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
             
Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset.  
In-Call Options  
During an active call there are several functions available by  
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.  
Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A  
green line will appear under the Headset button.  
Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The  
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.  
Hold: place the current active call on hold.  
Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.  
Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can  
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).  
End call: terminates the call.  
Press  
for more options:  
Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.  
Memo: allows you to write a memo.  
Message: allows you to write a message during a call.  
Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or  
through the earpiece.  
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting  
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the  
incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the  
current call.  
Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can  
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line  
will appear under the Speaker button.  
1. From the call screen, tap  
.
Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using  
green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.  
2. Confirm the option is enabled  
.
3. Select an available option. Choose from: Adapt Sound,  
Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.  
Soft sound, Clear sound, and Off.  
Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line  
will appear under the Mute button.  
Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will  
disappear when Mute is not activated.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large  
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will  
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.  
Activating Noise Reduction  
During a call it may be necessary to activate the noise  
reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the  
quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.  
Noise reduction in on by default.  
Switching Between Calls  
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may  
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to  
active and placing the other on hold.  
1. Press  
to turn Noise reduction off  
to turn Noise reduction on  
.
2. Press  
.
Placing a Call on Hold  
1. Tap Swap.  
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a  
conversation. You can also make another call while you have  
a call in progress if your network supports this service.  
Hold  
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the  
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so  
that you can continue conversing with that person. The  
active call will appear in a green box.  
1. While on a call, tap Hold  
. This action places  
the current caller on hold.  
2. Tap  
to end the currently active call.  
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold  
To end a specific call  
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a  
Unhold  
.
To make a new call while you have a call in progress  
green box.  
Hold  
1. Tap Hold  
.
2. Tap  
to end the specific call.  
2. Tap Add call  
to display the dialer.  
3. Tap  
to end the remaining call.  
3. Enter the new number and tap  
.
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
     
To answer a call while you have a call in progress  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
You can answer another call while you have a call in progress  
if you have activated your Call waiting feature. Otherwise, the  
other call will go to your Voicemail box. For more information,  
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a  
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this  
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined  
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
1. Tap  
and slide to the right to answer another call.  
2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call  
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have  
established with your phone (both active and on hold).  
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates  
the previous call.  
on hold.  
– or –  
Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first  
call.  
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with  
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.  
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.  
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the  
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap  
Swap again to switch back.  
1. Tap  
and slide to the right to answer the call.  
2. Tap  
and slide to the right to answer the next call.  
To end a call on hold  
1. Tap  
to disconnect the active call.  
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap  
to end the call.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call  
on hold.  
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)  
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so  
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by  
that the other person cannot hear you.  
tapping Merge  
.
Merge  
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,  
but do not want the person on the phone to hear  
you.  
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold  
Hold  
.
Unhold  
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold  
.
To mute your phone during a call  
6. Tap  
to end the call.  
1. Tap Mute  
.
Mute  
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call  
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the  
speakerphone feature.  
The Mute button now appears as  
activated.  
and Mute is  
Mute  
2. Tap Mute  
to deactivate the Mute function and  
1. Tap Speaker  
.
Mute  
Speaker  
reactivate the microphone.  
The Speaker button now appears as  
and the  
Speaker  
Bluetooth headset  
1. Tap Headset  
speakerphone is activated.  
.
Headset  
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your  
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When  
phone) to adjust the volume.  
found, connect to the headset.  
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker  
.
Speaker  
The Headset button now appears as  
and the  
Headset  
Bluetooth headset is activated.  
3. Tap Headset  
and reactivate the phone speaker.  
Call Functions  
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset  
Headset  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you  
are on another phone call.  
Searching for a Number in Address Book  
1. During the active call, press  
then tap Contacts.  
2. Tap the Address Book entry.  
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select  
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.  
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or  
when your phone is switched off.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Call waiting  
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming  
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is  
supported by the network, and you must first activate the  
Call Waiting feature:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Call Settings  
Additional settings Call waiting.  
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
To access the Call settings menu:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Call  
settings  
– or –  
.
Call forwarding  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Additional settings  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.  
Call forwarding  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call  
Settings  
My device  
.
For detailed information on all of the call settings, see “Call  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address Book  
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
You can also manage your Address Book on the web  
.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book  
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can  
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by  
following these steps:  
AT&T Address Book Activation  
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network  
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized  
between your phone and online address book. The changes  
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,  
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your  
contacts onto your new phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press Settings AT&T Address Book  
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to  
.
.
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.  
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be  
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap  
To activate the AT&T Address Book:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Your Address Book is displayed.  
Yes or No  
.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your  
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address  
Book screen is displayed. Tap Start Sync if you want to  
synchronize your Address Book.  
Note: You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Your phone is synchronized.  
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make  
a call or send a message through your Address Book.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
       
5. At the Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use prompt,  
tap OK  
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any  
previously assigned image on an existing contact.  
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to  
enter the full name. For more information, refer to  
“Entering Text” on page 62.  
.
Your Contact list is displayed.  
Adding a New Contact  
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your  
Address Book.  
– or –  
Tap  
next to the Name field to display additional  
Saving a Number from the Home screen  
name fields.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
5. Tap the Phone number field.  
The numerical keypad is displayed.  
Mobile  
2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap on Device SIM, or  
,
Account name.  
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new  
The Mobile button  
initially displays next to the  
entry by choosing one of three options:  
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or  
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an  
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number  
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and  
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,  
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.  
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done  
.
• Pictures by people: retrieve a previously shared image from  
your Gallery.  
6. Enter the phone number.  
Tap  
to add another Phone number field or tap  
Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign  
to delete a field.  
it to this entry, then tap Done  
.
7. Tap the Email address field.  
• S Memo: use an image from one of your S Memos.  
The keyboard is displayed.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Home  
The Home button  
initially displays next to the  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
Email field. If you want to add an Email address that is  
not a Home email address, tap the Home button and  
select another Email address type.  
When you call automated systems, you are often required to  
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually  
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers  
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses  
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two  
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you  
enter a number or press a key.  
8. Enter the Email address.  
Tap  
to add another Email address field or tap  
to delete a field.  
9. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to  
your new contact:  
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
, and then tap  
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, Favorites, ICE -  
emergency contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.  
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will  
sound when messages are received from this contact.  
• Message alert: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message alerts.  
the name or number to open the Contact.  
2. Tap  
to edit.  
3. Tap the phone number field.  
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait  
needs to be added.  
5. Tap  
.
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of  
vibration.  
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to  
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional  
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and  
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).  
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to  
discard.  
• Add another field  
:
tap this button to add additional fields.  
10. Tap Save to save the new contact.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
 
Finding an Address Book Entry  
Editing an Existing Contact  
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and  
change or delete the information, or you can add additional  
fields to the contact’s list of information.  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding  
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.  
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a  
single entity, called the Address Book.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum  
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how  
they are stored may differ.  
2. Tap the Contact that you want to edit.  
3. Tap  
to edit.  
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a  
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to  
the contacts beginning with that letter.  
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.  
Using Contacts  
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM  
card location number or by using the Search field to locate  
the entry.  
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.  
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the  
message icon to send a message.  
From the Address book, you can also send messages.  
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a  
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see  
Linking Contacts  
Linking Contact Information  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to  
another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact  
with a different name or account information.  
3. Press  
Link contact.  
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.  
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each  
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.  
The contact list is displayed.  
Note: Only contacts stored on your phone can be linked.  
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to  
link). The second contact is now linked with the first  
and the account information is merged into one screen.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a  
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also  
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married  
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge  
these accounts into your Contacts list you can link all of her  
entries and view the information in one record.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but  
displays in one record for easier viewing when you link  
the contacts.  
The next time you synchronize your phone with your  
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account  
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your  
contacts list.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
   
5. Tap the link icon  
under the Connection bar to  
Marking a Contact as Default  
view the contact information you joined. The contacts  
and information displays with an icon next to the  
contact name to indicate what type of account  
information is contained in the entry.  
When you use messaging type applications, the application  
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a  
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different  
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be  
looking for the “default” number or entry.  
Unjoining a Contact  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
.
2. Tap a Contact name.  
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same  
contact with a different name or account information.  
3. Press  
Mark as default. The Mark as default  
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact  
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.  
The radio button next to the default contact will be  
green.  
3. Tap the link icon  
4. Tap the minus sign  
want to unjoin.  
under the Connection bar.  
next to entry in which you  
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next  
to another entry that you want to be the default. The  
5. At the Separate contact prompt, tap OK  
.
The contact is now separated and no longer displays in  
the merged record screen.  
radio button will turn green, then tap Done  
.
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Synchronizing Accounts  
Note: You can also synchronize your accounts using the  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications  
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if  
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,  
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts  
list.  
Address Book Options  
You can access Address Book options while at the main  
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific  
entry.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press then tap Accounts  
.
.
Options in Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
If you have previously added any accounts, the Sync  
settings prompt is displayed with your current accounts  
listed.  
then press  
.
2. The following options are displayed:  
3. Tap an account that you would like to synchronize.  
4. At the Sync settings screen, tap the options that you  
would like to synchronize for that account.  
5. Tap Sync now to synchronize the account.  
The account is synchronized.  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your  
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.  
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.  
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your  
memory card or USB storage.  
6. Press  
to return to the Contacts list.  
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s  
information via various applications.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
     
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,  
ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol),  
and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account  
and then follow the on-screen instructions.  
Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual  
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.  
AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address  
Book so you can sync your contacts.  
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For  
• Help: provides additional information on using your contacts.  
Options at Selected Contact Screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
• Send message/email: allows you to send a text or message.  
• Contacts to display: You can choose to display all of your  
contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or  
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized  
list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.  
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:  
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press  
.
3. The following options are displayed:  
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for  
the contact.  
• Edit: allows you to edit the contact’s information.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address  
Book.  
Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display  
contacts that have phone numbers.  
List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.  
Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last  
name first.  
• Link contact: allows you to link contacts with other contacts.  
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have  
been linked. This option only appears if the contact has been  
linked.  
Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service  
numbers.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked  
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays  
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,  
• Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your  
3. Tap  
to edit.  
4. Tap Groups  
.
5. Tap the group that you would like to add the contact to.  
You may select as many groups as you like.  
6. Tap Save  
.
7. After returning to the main edit screen, tap Save again.  
The contact is added to the group.  
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s  
information via various applications.  
Removing a Contact From a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Groups  
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press Remove member  
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove  
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the  
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.  
• Add shortcut to home: allows you to place a shortcut for this  
contact on your Home screen.  
.
Groups  
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this  
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their  
name.  
Groups  
Adding a Contact to a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
5. Tap Done  
.
.
The contacts are now removed from the group.  
2. Tap the Contact that you want to add to a group.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Tap Done  
.
Creating a New Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Groups  
9. Tap Save to save the new Group category.  
Create.  
Groups  
Editing a Caller Group  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as  
part of the selected group.  
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a new group name. For more  
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 62.  
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose a ringtone for assignment  
to this new group. Tap a ringtone to hear how it  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Groups  
.
Groups  
2. Tap a group entry.  
sounds, then tap OK  
.
3. Press  
Edit group.  
– or –  
4. Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone,  
,
Tap Add to select a ringtone from your music files.  
or Vibration pattern fields.  
4. Tap Message alert to choose an alert tone for  
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.  
6. Tap Done  
assignment to this new group, then tap OK  
.
.
5. Tap Vibration pattern to choose a vibration audio file for  
7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.  
assignment to this new group, then tap OK  
– or –  
.
Address Book Favorites  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can add them to your Favorites list.  
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to  
create your own vibration pattern.  
To view your Favorites list:  
6. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.  
From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Favorites  
7. Tap each contact you want to add to create a  
.
Favorites  
checkmark. You can also tap Select all  
.
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adding Favorites to your Address Book  
Managing Address Book Contacts  
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the  
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Favorites  
.
Favorites  
2. Press  
Add to favorites.  
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card  
3. When the Contacts list is displayed, tap a contact that  
you want to add to your favorites list. You may select  
more than one.  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,  
only the name, phone number, and email address are  
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to  
another phone that does not support additional fields on  
the SIM card, this additional information may not be  
available.  
4. Tap Done  
.
5. A gold star will appear next to the contact image in the  
Address Book.  
Removing Favorites from your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
.
2. Within the Contacts list, tap a contact that you want to  
remove from your favorites list. Contacts in your  
Favorites list will have a gold star.  
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone  
contacts.  
3. Tap the gold star in the top right corner of the display.  
4. The gold star will change to a white star and the  
contact is removed from your Favorites list. It will no  
longer appear next to the contact image in the Address  
Book.  
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the  
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
     
4. Tap Done to copy.  
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK  
.
SIM Management  
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.  
2. Tap Delete Contacts from SIM  
.
Copying Contacts to the Phone  
The phone then displays a list of your current SIM  
contacts.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM  
card.  
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM  
.
3. At the Create contact under account prompt, tap on  
Device or an account name that you would like to copy  
the contact to.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the  
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts  
stored on your SIM card.  
4. Tap Delete  
.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
5. At the Delete Contacts from SIM prompt, tap OK  
.
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.  
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to  
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone  
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s  
5. Tap Done to copy.  
memory.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
The selected numbers are copied.  
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to delete.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.  
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or  
Cancel to exit.  
Using the Service Dialing Numbers  
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)  
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may  
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and  
directory inquiries.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Settings  
2. Tap Service numbers  
.
.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).  
4. Tap a number and the call is made.  
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card  
supports Service Dialing Numbers.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
 
Section 5: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.  
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-  
in camera functionality. Your 13 megapixel camera produces  
photos in JPEG format.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap  
Camera  
to activate the camera mode.  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
– or –  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to  
zoom in.  
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap  
on-screen icons to access various camera options and  
settings.  
Using the Camera  
Taking Photos  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as  
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then  
pressing the camera key.  
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the  
area you touch.  
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.  
(The picture is automatically stored within your  
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,  
all pictures are stored on the Phone.)  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Taking Dual Camera Photos  
With the Dual Camera feature, you can take a picture with  
both the front and rear cameras at the same time.  
Front  
Facing  
Camera  
Dual Camera  
Camera Mode  
Record  
Quick Settings  
To take a Dual Camera picture:  
Video  
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Dual Camera icon  
located at the top left side of the screen.  
The camera viewfinder displays an image from the  
front-facing camera within a postage stamp picture  
frame on top of the main image displayed from the  
rear-facing camera.  
Take  
Picture  
Change  
Mode  
Image  
Viewer  
(Gallery)  
Viewfinder  
Effects  
2. Press the Camera key ( ) to take the picture.  
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch  
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen  
inwards to zoom out.  
To resize the front camera image:  
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame until  
the resize handles appear, then drag a corner to  
enlarge the image.  
You can magnify the picture up to x4.  
8. Press  
to return to the viewfinder.  
To reposition the front camera image  
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame to  
detach it and then move it to a desired location.  
Multimedia  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding  
background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound  
is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.  
Drama: Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object  
and then merge them together into one image.  
Animated photo: Use this to create a picture in which a few  
selected static objects move by animating objects detected by  
the device.  
Camera Modes  
There are many different camera modes that you can use to  
help optimize your photos depending on the conditions and  
your experience.  
MODE  
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button  
to change the mode to one of the following:  
Auto: Automatically adjusts your camera to optimize color and  
brightness. This is the default setting  
Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for  
gentler images.  
Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and  
contrasts.  
Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,  
and then choose the best photos among them. Press the  
Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap  
and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.  
Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same  
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press  
the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,  
tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best  
individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each  
individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,  
and tap Save.  
Eraser: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any  
passers by.  
Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the  
Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in  
any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview  
screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the  
panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button  
again.  
Sports: Use this to take fast action photos.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Night: Use this to take photos in low-light conditions, without  
using the flash. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos.  
Photos are automatically merged into a single photo.  
Camera and Camcorder Settings  
This section describes the different settings that you can  
configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are  
available in both still camera and video camera modes. The  
available options vary by mode.  
Quick Settings  
Tap  
at the top of the display to quickly change  
1. From the viewfinder, tap  
Camera Settings).  
(Quick Settings) ➔  
Camera settings. Not all of the following options are available  
in both still camera and video camera modes. The available  
options vary by mode.  
(
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,  
Camcorder, and General tabs. The settings that are  
displayed will depend on what camera mode you are  
in.  
Configure Camera settings.  
Activate or deactivate the flash.  
Camera  
:
Use this to activate or deactivate night detection.  
Activate or deactivate the voice control to take photos.  
Select a resolution for videos.  
• Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher  
resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up  
more memory.  
• Burst shot: allows several photographs to be captured in quick  
succession by touching and holding the Camera button.  
• Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based  
on face detection technology.  
Activate or deactivate the sharing options.  
Hide Quick settings.  
Multimedia  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Metering modes: allows you to set how the camera measures  
or meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.  
• ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital  
camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a  
lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a  
higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let  
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.  
• Anti-shake: compensates for camera movement.  
• Auto night detection: activates or deactivates the night  
detection feature.  
Settings:  
• Location tag: attach a location tag to the photo. To improve  
GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may  
be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas,  
or in poor weather conditions. Your location may appear on  
your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid  
this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.  
• Review pics/videos: set this option if you want to view each  
picture or video after you take it.  
• Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose  
from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.  
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to  
Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.  
• Save as: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.  
Camcorder  
:
• Video size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution  
for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more  
memory.  
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so  
images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are  
designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are  
similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in  
professional cameras.  
• Video stabilization: Activate or deactivate Optical Image  
Stabilization.  
• Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by  
moving the slider.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition  
when selecting subjects.  
Editing a Photo  
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor  
application on your device. The photo editor application  
provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on  
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,  
contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects  
used for editing the picture.  
• Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.  
• Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that  
allows you to verbally take a photo.  
• Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added  
as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag  
described above.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery  
.
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.  
• Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take  
and save a mirror-image video when using self-recording  
mode.  
3. With the image displayed, press  
Edit to launch  
the Photo editor.  
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.  
• Shutter sound: Turn the shutter sound on or off.  
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.  
Note: To select the picture area, touch and hold the current  
picture.  
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the  
image and then selecting an available option:  
• Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options  
such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and  
Selection mode.  
Viewing your Pictures  
After you take a photo, you can access various options from  
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For  
• Select all: select the entire area of the current image.  
Multimedia  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Clipboard: copies the currently selected area to your device’s  
clipboard.  
Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created  
on-screen stickers atop your current image.  
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:  
Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your  
current picture by using either a brush/pen or  
eraser.  
Previous: move to previous photo project.  
Frame: places a pre-created border style atop  
your current image.  
Next: move to next photo project.  
6. Press  
to access the following options:  
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4  
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.  
• Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it  
to your gallery.  
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a  
photo.  
• Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.  
Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a  
new image for editing.  
Color:allowsyoutoAutoadjustcolor, Brightness,  
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,  
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.  
• Share via: allows you to share your saved photo via various  
applications.  
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your  
photo.  
• Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact  
photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, Lock screen, or  
wallpaper.  
Portrait: allows you to apply various face  
correction effects.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Tap the Video key (  
) to begin shooting video. The  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send  
videos.  
red light will blink while recording.  
5. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area  
you touch.  
6. To capture an image from the video while recording,  
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to  
tap  
. This feature is not available while the  
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.  
anti-shake feature is activated.  
7. Tap the Pause key (  
) to stop the recording and  
Shooting Video  
save the video file to your Camera folder.  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your  
subject with sufficient light by having the light source  
behind you.  
8. Tap the Stop key (  
to stop the recording and save  
)
the video file to your Camera folder.  
9. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,  
then tap  
10. Press  
to play your video.  
to return to the viewer.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
activate the camera mode.  
to  
Viewing your Videos  
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a  
After you take a video, you can access various options from  
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and  
viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder  
at the subject.  
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control  
buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
Multimedia  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Gallery  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message.  
3. The following options are available at the top of the  
1. Tap  
Gallery  
.
screen:  
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will  
be displayed with folder name and number of files.  
• Change player  
picture is displayed on if you are using Samsung Link.  
: allows you to change the device the  
• Share via  
applications.  
• Delete  
: allows you to share the picture via various  
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be  
displayed.  
: allows you to delete the picture.  
: activates the camera.  
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you  
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files  
or other file management applications and try again. For  
• Camera  
4. Press  
for additional options.  
Viewing Videos  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
Viewing Pictures  
1. From the main gallery, press  
Slideshow to see a  
slideshow of all of your pictures.  
2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.  
1. Tap a video to select it.  
2. Tap  
to play the video.  
3. Press  
for additional options.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
For video player controls, see “Video” on page 189.  
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying  
the Lock screen. They must both be active and  
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device  
be on the Home screen.  
Using S Beam to Share Pictures  
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam  
large files directly to another compatible device that is in  
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD  
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and  
videos from your gallery, music files from your Music, and  
more.  
Place devices back to back  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on  
Settings.  
.
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.  
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on  
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap Gallery  
.
.
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the  
preview window.  
Tap thhe souurce image  
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
to begin (1).  
Multimedia  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer.  
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the  
source device:  
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.  
7. The picture(s) is transferred to the other device.  
- Pull them apart  
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on  
the source device (providing the file)  
- Place them together again  
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer (2).  
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few  
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then  
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.  
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:  
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap  
Gallery  
.
2. Locate the selected folder.  
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark  
on it and all desired images.  
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
to begin.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 6: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive different  
types of messages. It also includes the features and  
functionality associated with messaging.  
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and  
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s multimedia message service.  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a  
sound file, or a video clip to a text message  
changes the message from a text message to a  
multimedia message.  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
AT&T Messages  
Hangouts  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For  
Google+  
ChatON  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive  
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s message service.  
Messaging  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating and Sending Messages  
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less  
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will  
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by  
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted  
entries.  
This section describes how to create a send a message using  
the Messaging app.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
Compose  
.
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access  
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with  
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.  
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap  
Apps  
Messaging  
.
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer  
to “Entering Text” on page 62.  
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a  
recipient or tap to select a recipient from your  
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.  
Contacts. You can also select the recipient based on  
Groups, Favorites, or Logs.  
6. Review your message and tap Send  
.
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the  
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be  
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done  
.
automatically saved as a draft.  
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more  
Message Options  
Options before composing a message  
Options while composing a message  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
1. While composing a message, press  
to reveal  
2. Before composing a message, press  
to reveal  
additional messaging options.  
additional messaging options:  
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy  
face to your message.  
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for  
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the  
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,  
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient  
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your  
Messaging Search window and tap  
.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.  
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will  
appear next to the message. Tap Delete  
.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its  
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your  
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not  
already in your Contacts list.  
contents.  
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and  
its contents.  
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.  
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.  
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.  
• Scheduling allows you to assign the current message for  
scheduled delivery at a designated time.  
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages  
folder and its contents.  
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its  
contents.  
• Font size: allows you to set the size of your letters when  
messaging.  
Messaging  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam  
so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam  
folder.  
Adding attachments to a message  
To add an attachment to your message, tap  
one of the following options:  
and select  
• Remove from spam numbers allows you to unregister a  
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if  
the number was previously registered as spam.  
• Discard: allows you to delete the current message.  
Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can  
both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target  
language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the  
designated language). Other options include, Check Incoming  
messages only, and Include original text in outgoing message.  
Tap to create a checkmark.  
Image: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list  
to add it to your message.  
Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take  
a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by  
tapping Save  
Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,  
then add it to your message  
.
.
Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,  
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it  
to your message by tapping Save  
.
• Font size: allows you to set the size of your letters when  
messaging.  
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the  
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to  
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done  
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and  
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then  
automatically attached to the message.  
.
S Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select  
the desired event and tap Done  
Viewing New Received Messages  
1. When you receive a new message, the new message  
icon will appear at the top of your screen.  
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
.
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing  
your location.  
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,  
then add it to your message by tapping Done  
.
– or –  
Adding Additional Text  
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
tap the new message to view it.  
then  
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and  
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.  
1. While composing a message, press  
Add text.  
The selected message appears in the display.  
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:  
3. To play a multimedia message, tap  
.
• S Memo: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.  
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a  
calendar event to your message.  
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap  
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages  
have been added), touch the screen and in a single  
motion, scroll up or down the page.  
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the  
location on Google Maps.  
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of  
any of your contacts to your message.  
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and  
sentences.  
The information is added to your message.  
Messaging  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Copy: copies the currently selected message bubble from the  
thread.  
Message Threads  
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped  
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see  
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and  
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed  
in the order in which they were received, with the latest  
message displayed at the top.  
• Lock/Unlock: locks or unlocks the currently selected message  
bubble from being accidentally deleted.  
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message  
bubble to an external recipient.  
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as  
a single text message within the SIM card.  
• View message details: displays details for the currently  
selected message bubble.  
To access message thread options:  
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the  
message to display the following options:  
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.  
• Add to contact: begins the process of adding the new number  
to your Contacts list.  
Translate: translates the text from the currently selected  
bubble into a desired language.  
Deleting Messages  
• Delete: deletes the currently selected message thread.  
• Add to spam numbers: adds the current sender to a spam list.  
ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked.  
Deleting a single message thread  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete  
.
To access additional Bubble options:  
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
Touch and hold the message bubble within an active  
message conversation to display the following options:  
• Delete: deletes any currently selected message bubble from  
the thread.  
cancel.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Deleting multiple message threads  
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Press  
Delete threads.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark  
Settings.  
will appear beside each message you select.  
2. The following Messaging settings are available:  
4. Tap Delete  
.
General settings:  
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
cancel.  
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than having them overwritten.  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the  
Message Search feature.  
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
messages can be in one conversation.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
2. Tap Search  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to  
search for, then tap  
.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how  
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.  
Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to  
use in your messaging.  
.
.
4. All messages that contain the search string you  
Text message (SMS) settings:  
entered are displayed.  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.  
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your  
Message center where your messages reside while the system  
is attempting to deliver them.  
Messaging  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or  
Automatic.  
Display:  
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles  
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that  
surround each message.  
Multimedia message (MMS) settings:  
• Group messaging: allows you to send a single message to  
multiple recipients.  
• Background style: allows you to choose from several  
background styles for your messages.  
• Auto retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve  
messages automatically.  
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by  
using the up or down volume keys.  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
Push message settings:  
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from  
the network.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with  
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that  
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the  
Core MM Content Domain.  
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:  
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)  
messages.  
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that  
you will receive CB messages on.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
• MMS alert: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode  
becomes active.  
Notifications settings:  
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
status bar.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message notifications.  
Signature settings:  
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create  
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.  
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your  
message.  
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated  
with message alerts.  
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new  
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every  
10 minutes.  
Spam message settings:  
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure  
available spam settings such as:  
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a  
preview of new message text on the Status bar.  
Emergency message settings:  
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and  
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.  
• Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text  
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.  
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks  
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.  
• Emergency alerts: allows you to receive wireless emergency  
alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS).  
• Emergency notification review: allows you to play the  
emergency alert tone so you will know what to expect when an  
alert is received.  
• Alert reminder: allows you to set reminders after you receive  
an alert. You can select Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15  
minutes, or Off (default).  
Messaging  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Threats  
(Extreme and Severe) and AMBER Alerts. Alerts issued by the  
President can not be disabled. To disable Imminent Threats  
and AMBER Alerts, follow the instructions below:  
Emergency Alerts  
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts  
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) which  
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting  
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to  
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the  
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's  
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be  
available. For more information, please contact your wireless  
provider.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
2. Press Settings  
3. Scroll to the bottom and tap Emergency alerts  
.
.
.
4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).  
Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove  
the checkmark.  
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive  
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are  
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and  
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within  
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency  
Alert message.  
Using Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various  
email services. You can also receive text message alerts  
when you receive an important email.  
Creating an Email Account  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:  
.
Alerts issued by the President  
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life (Extreme and  
Severe)  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email  
account by default, tap the checkbox to create a  
checkmark. This checkbox only appears if you have  
previously set up an email account.  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
5. Tap Next  
.
6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options  
6. Tap Manual setup  
.
you would like.  
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.  
7. Tap Next  
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).  
9. Tap Done  
.
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,  
User name and Password, then tap Next  
.
.
9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK  
.
Creating a Corporate Email Account  
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to  
The Account options screen is displayed.  
synchronize with a corporate email account.  
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
then tap Next  
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and  
tap Done  
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.  
12. Press Settings to change the account settings.  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
Messaging  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. The new Email account is displayed.  
Creating Additional Email Accounts  
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first  
account, follow these steps:  
Using Gmail  
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the  
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the  
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized  
with your Gmail account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
Signing into Your Gmail  
2. Press  
Settings.  
3. Tap Add account to add another email account.  
4. Enter the information required to set up another  
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to  
access Gmail.  
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
Switching Between Email Accounts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
Gmail  
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
2. Tap the Inbox button  
at the top of your screen.  
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.  
3. Tap the Email account Inbox you would like to switch  
to. You can also select Combined inbox which will  
display email messages from all accounts.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Press  
for additional options.  
Creating a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap  
screen to create a new message.  
at the bottom of the  
Hangouts  
Hangouts is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. You can connect with  
your friends across computers and various Android devices.  
You can have conversations or video calls with up to 10  
friends.  
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a  
comma.  
3. Tap  
copy.  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind  
Note: The first time you use Hangouts, you will need to  
download the updated application from the Play Store.  
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more  
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your  
message.  
6. Tap  
to send.  
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
Viewing a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.  
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the  
screen after a message has been selected:  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Hangouts  
.
3. The first time you access Hangouts, tap Confirm to  
confirm your mobile number. If the number is not  
correct, tap Edit Number to change it.  
• Archive  
: archives the selected message.  
• Delete : deletes the message.  
• Mark Unread  
: after reading a message, marks as unread.  
4. Begin using Hangouts.  
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.  
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.  
Messaging  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Press  
Hangouts.  
Help for more information on using  
Messages App  
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail  
messages together into a single conversation thread and is  
accessible by phone or computer.  
Google +  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. The first time you use AT&T Messages, tap Update  
AT&T Messages  
Messages  
.
.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Google+  
.
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Messages app, you will  
need to download the updated application from the Play  
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update  
then follow the on-screen instructions. For more  
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
Google+.  
– or –  
Tap Add account to create another account.  
4. At the Legal stuff... screen, tap Accept to continue.  
5. Tap Call Voicemail to record a personal greeting and set  
up your app.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.  
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.  
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the AT&T  
Messages app.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
ChatON  
Provides a global mobile communication service where you  
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share  
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages  
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
ChatON  
.
2. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not  
3. Read the introduction and tap Next  
.
Note: The first time you use the ChatON app, you will need to  
download the updated application from the Play Store.  
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update then  
follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register and use  
the ChatON app.  
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com  
.
Messaging  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Section 7: Changing Your Settings  
This section explains the settings used for customizing your  
device.  
My device  
:
My device  
This tab provides access to device configuration  
and customization features. Features include:  
Lock screen, Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home  
screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Hands-free  
mode, Power saving mode, Accessory,  
Accessing Settings  
1. From any Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
– or –  
From any Home screen, press  
Settings.  
Accessibility, Language and input, Motions and  
gestures, Smart screen, Air view, and Voice control.  
Settings Tabs  
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the  
Accounts  
:
Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at  
the top of the screen:  
This tab provides both the ability to create and  
modifyyour accounts(example; Samsungaccount,  
Email,Google account,etc.)andaccessBackupand  
reset features.  
Connections  
:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related to  
the connection of your device to external sources.  
Features include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage,  
More networks (Airplane mode, Default messaging  
app, Printing, Mobile networks, Tethering and  
portable hotspot, and VPN), NFC,  
More  
:
This tab provides access to the remaining set of  
devicesettingsnotlistedundertheotherthreetabs.  
These include Location, Security, Application  
manager, Default applications, Battery, Storage,  
Date and time, and About device.  
S Beam, Nearby devices, and Screen Mirroring.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Note: The settings for your device are described below in the  
order that they appear within the Settings menu. Options  
under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by  
My device, Accounts, and More settings.  
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct  
button.  
Wi-Fi Settings  
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on  
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings  
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage  
Activating Wi-Fi  
wireless access points.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Wi-Fi  
2. Press Advanced  
The following options are available:  
Settings  
Connections  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Wi-Fi.  
.
.
.
3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more  
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.  
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi  
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the  
Activating Wi-Fi Direct  
right to turn it on  
.
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
• Sort by: allows you to sort by Alphabet or Signal strength.  
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to  
disconnect from Wi-Fi.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Wi-Fi  
Settings  
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
       
• Always allow scanning: allows the Google location service  
and other apps to scan for networks, even when Wi-Fi is turned  
off.  
Activating Bluetooth  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Connections  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
The Bluetooth icon is displayed on the status bar.  
.
• Auto network switch: allows the device to automatically  
switch between a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network.  
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an  
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.  
• Install certificates: allows you to install security certificates  
that you have on a MicroSD card.  
.
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Bluetooth  
Settings  
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.  
.
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After  
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more  
Bluetooth settings  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a  
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices  
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices  
with which to pair.  
3. Press  
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:  
• Visibility timeout: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never time out.  
• Received files: Shows the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Help: Provides additional information on Bluetooth and  
Bluetooth settings.  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
may account for data usage differently.  
4. Tap the checkbox next to SAMSUNG-SGH-I337 if you do  
not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices.  
6. Press  
to display additional options. Tap to activate.  
Data Usage  
• Data roaming: enables data roaming on your device.  
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services  
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.  
• Auto-sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync  
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi  
usage.  
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and  
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Data usage  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile  
data usage on.  
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.  
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and  
allow a data limit to be set.  
More networks  
This option displays additional Connectivity information.  
From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Connections More networks  
4. Touch and drag the orange limit bar to the GB limit that  
you desire.  
.
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a  
date.  
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,  
Tethering and portable hotspots, and VPN.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
how much data was used per application.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
       
Airplane mode  
Default messaging app  
This option allows you to set the default messaging app that  
you can use to send all of your messages.  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving  
calls or data is prohibited.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
app and make a selection.  
Printing  
Settings  
Default messaging  
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online  
information or applications.  
With the Printing option, you can set your device to print on  
compatible Samsung Wi-Fi printers.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
2. Tap Samsung Print Service Plugin  
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, to turn Printing ON  
Settings  
.
Printing  
.
2. Tap the Airplane mode checkbox to create a  
checkmark and activate the feature.  
.
.
3. At the Turn on Airplane mode prompt, tap OK  
.
Your device will search for compatible printers.  
The Airplane mode icon  
your screen.  
is displayed at the top of  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
5. Press  
for additional options.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Point Names  
Mobile networks  
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point  
(hotspot).  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Mobile networks options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
2. Tap Access Point Names  
Settings  
Mobile data  
Mobile networks.  
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option  
must be selected. It is set on by default.  
.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active  
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right  
of the name.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
Settings  
Mobile networks.  
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the  
Network Operators  
feature.  
Using this feature you can view the current network  
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator  
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.  
Data Roaming  
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service  
provider’s partner networks and access data services when  
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
Settings  
Mobile networks.  
Settings  
.
Mobile networks.  
The current network connection displays at the bottom  
of the list.  
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate  
the feature.  
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching  
for an available network.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
 
USB tethering  
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer  
speed and time.  
Note: To enable USB tethering on your phone, dial 611 or go to  
att.com/mywireless to set up the service.  
Default setup options  
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically  
search for an available network. You can set this option to  
Manual to select a network each time you connect.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Connections  
More networks  
Tethering and  
portable hotspot  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
3. Tap Default setup  
Settings  
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.  
Mobile networks.  
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the  
.
feature. The USB tethering icon  
top of your screen.  
is displayed at the  
.
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network  
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to  
automatically select a network.  
Mobile Hotspot  
Note: To enable Mobile Hotspot on your phone, dial 611 or go  
to att.com/mywireless to set up the service.  
Tethering & portable hotspot  
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data  
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile Hotspot  
.
– or –  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Connections  
More networks  
Tethering and  
portable hotspot  
Mobile Hotspot  
.
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it  
The connected device can now use internet through  
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
changes to the ON position  
The Mobile Hotspot icon  
your screen.  
.
is displayed at the top of  
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be  
different depending on the type of the other device.  
3. Tap Configure at the bottom of the screen.  
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,  
Security setting, and Password.  
Help  
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help  
5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see  
them displayed.  
for additional information  
VPN settings  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
6. Tap Save  
.
7. Press  
for the following option:  
• Timeout settings: allows you to set the time your device will be  
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
configure one.  
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other  
devices  
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to  
Adding a Basic VPN  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),  
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-  
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT  
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
your phone.  
2. Find GALAXY_S4_XXXX in the Wi-Fi network list and  
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits  
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi  
hotspot on your device.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
 
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
8. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display  
additional VPN options.  
9. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
3. Tap Basic VPN  
4. Tap (Add VPN network)  
Settings  
.
Adding an IPsec VPN  
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
VPN  
.
.
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.  
6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The  
options are:  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections More networks  
3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN  
4. Tap Add VPN connection  
Settings  
.
VPN  
.
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)  
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol  
Security Pre-Shared Key)  
.
5. Enter a password, confirm the password, and tap OK  
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN  
connection name field.  
.
L2TP/IPSec RSA  
IPSec Xauth PSK  
7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu.  
8. Enter any other required information.  
9. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display  
additional VPN options.  
IPSec Xauth RSA  
IPSec Hybrid RSA  
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields  
that are dependent upon the Type you entered  
previously.  
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NFC  
S Beam  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as Android Beam and S Beam.  
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another  
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.  
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music  
files from your Music app, and more.  
To activate NFC, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections S Beam  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections NFC  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC  
field, to turn NFC ON  
Android Beam  
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content  
to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close  
together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,  
contacts, and more.  
Settings  
.
.
.
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-  
.
capable device and the content is transferred.  
Nearby devices  
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby  
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Connections NFC Android Beam.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Nearby devices  
Settings  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam ON  
.
.
3. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Nearby devices on  
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-  
capable device and the content is transferred.  
.
4. Verify  
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the  
screen.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
             
5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK  
6. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would  
like to share. Tap OK  
.
Note: This feature requires the optional AllShare Cast dongle  
which is available as an accessory. See your AT&T  
Customer Service Representative for more information.  
.
7. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to allow.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Screen Mirroring  
Settings  
.
8. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to not allow.  
2. Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the HDMI device  
using an HDMI A-to-A cable.  
9. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any  
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or  
SD card.  
3. Press  
Mirroring.  
Help for information on using Screen  
10. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions  
you’ll take when you upload content from other  
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always  
ask, or Always reject.  
Lock Screen Settings  
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
Screen Mirroring  
The Screen Mirroring feature allows you to share the media  
files on your device screen with an HDMI device such as an  
HDMI TV.  
Screen Lock  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Lock screen.  
2. Tap Screen lock for these options then follow the on-  
screen instructions to set up your Screen lock:  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
• Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock  
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will  
never lock.  
• Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the  
phone. You can select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.  
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.  
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to  
wake-up your phone.  
Lock screen options  
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.  
• Set wake-up command designates your wake-up  
commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the on-  
screen prompts to create a new verbal command.  
Note: The Lock screen options will differ depending on what  
type of Screen Lock you have selected in step 2.  
Face unlock options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Lock screen  
Settings  
My device  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
.
2. The following options are available depending on the  
• Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your  
device’s face matching capability by capturing your face in  
different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or  
clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Screen Lock type that you have selected:  
Swipe options  
• Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on  
your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is  
enabled.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
     
• Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face  
unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.  
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.  
• Notification panel: allows you to set the brightness of your  
notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that  
you want to display at the top of the notification panel. For more  
• Multi window: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic  
Multi window feature.  
Pattern options  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
• Make pattern visible allows you to see the pattern as you  
draw it.  
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color  
modes.  
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.  
• Reading mode: allows you to activate an optimized reading  
mode for selected applications. This menu allows you to assign  
available applications (such as Calculator, Camera, Contacts,  
etc...) for enhancement using the Reader mode. Tap the OFF /  
PIN and Password options  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
ON icon next to Reading mode to turn it on  
.
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.  
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap  
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag  
the slider and tap OK.  
Display Settings  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Display  
The following options display:  
Settings  
My device  
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display  
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.  
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30  
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.  
.
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home  
screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when  
your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the OFF / ON icon next  
LED indicator  
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,  
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn  
on by default unless you turn them off.  
to Daydream to turn it on  
instructions.  
. Follow the on-screen  
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will  
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider  
selection.  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device LED indicator  
Settings  
My device  
.
3. Tap the following LED indicator options to create a  
checkmark and turn them on or off:  
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.  
Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before  
the Touch key light automatically turns off.  
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the  
charger.  
• Show battery percentage: allows you to see the battery  
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of  
the display.  
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.  
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls,  
messages, or application events.  
• Edit after screen capture: allows you to go edit a screen  
immediately after taking a screen capture.  
• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice.  
The LED only lights up when the screen is off.  
• Auto adjust screen tone: allows you to save power because  
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the  
LCD brightness.  
• Increase touch sensitivity: allows you to adjust the touch  
sensitivity of your phone automatically depending on the type of  
material on the display.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
 
Ringtones  
This option allows you to set the ringtone.  
Sound Settings  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound  
2. Tap Ringtones  
Settings  
My device  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound  
Settings  
My device  
.
.
.
The following options display:  
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
Volume  
– or –  
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all  
Tap Add to select a file from your music files.  
Vibrations  
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
My device Sound  
2. Tap Vibrations  
phone sounds in one easy location.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound Volume.  
Settings  
My device  
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume  
My device  
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.  
.
3. Tap OK  
.
.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK  
.
Vibration intensity  
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the  
– or –  
vibration is for different options.  
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound Vibration intensity  
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration  
Settings  
create your own vibration.  
My device  
.
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic  
feedback.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the feature:  
Default notification sound  
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for  
• Dialing keypad tone: makes a sound when you tap a key on  
the keyboard.  
notifications and alarms.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound  
2. Tap Default notification sound  
Settings  
My device  
.
Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.  
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is  
locked or unlocked.  
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys  
and on certain UI interactions.  
Vibrate when ringing  
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate  
Samsung Keyboard Settings  
The Samsung keyboard settings are used when you use the  
dialing pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap  
the screen.  
whenever it rings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound  
Settings  
My device  
.
2. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark and  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound  
Settings  
My device  
enable the feature.  
.
System Tone Settings  
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing  
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the  
screen.  
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the feature:  
• Key-tap sound: makes a sound when you tap a key on the  
Samsung keyboard.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound  
Settings  
My device  
• Key-tap vibration: makes a vibration when you tap a key on  
the Samsung keyboard.  
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the  
following options:  
Audio Output  
This sound feature configures the audio output.  
• Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and  
widgets on your home screens.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
My device  
My device Sound Audio output  
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time  
smartphone users on the home screens.  
2. Choose from either Stereo or Surround.  
Adapt sound  
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call  
sounds.  
3. Tap Apply  
.
Call Settings  
To access the Call settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Sound Adapt sound  
2. Read the instructions and tap Start  
Settings  
.
My device  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
.
My device  
Call.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your  
– or –  
personal call sound.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Call  
.
Home screen mode  
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the  
conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier  
user experience for the first-time smartphone users using  
Call rejection  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Call  
Call rejection.  
Easy mode  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Home screen mode  
.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Auto reject mode on  
Settings  
My device  
.
.
3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following  
options:  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• Off: to turn Auto reject mode off.  
• The home key answers calls: Tap this option to be able to  
accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.  
• All numbers: to reject all calls.  
• Voice control: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming  
calls by using your voice.  
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.  
4. Tap Auto reject list  
.
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a  
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.  
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.  
6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically  
Turn off screen during calls  
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.  
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that  
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.  
Set up call rejection messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Set up call rejection messages  
to manually add a reject message.  
My device  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Turn off screen during calls to  
create a checkmark and enable the feature.  
Settings  
My device  
2. Tap  
– or –  
Call  
.
My device  
Call alerts  
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed  
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the  
message if desired.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Call  
Call alerts.  
2. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and  
activate the features:  
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.  
Answering/ending calls  
• Answer vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the  
called party answers the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Answering/ending calls  
2. The following options are available:  
My device  
My device  
Call  
.
• Call-end vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the  
call ends.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
• Call connect tone: plays a tone when a call is connected.  
• Minute minder: beeps twice every minute that you are on a  
call.  
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be  
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show  
number.  
• Call forwarding: allows you to forward your calls to another  
number.  
• Call end tone: plays a tone when a call is ended.  
• Alerts on calls: turns on alarm and message notifications  
during a call.  
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific  
area code to all outbound calls.  
Call Accessories  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Call accessories  
2. The following options are available:  
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone  
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.  
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call  
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.  
• Fixed dialing numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to  
a limited set of phone numbers.  
Settings  
.
My device  
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically  
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.  
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before  
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.  
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when  
the device is locked.  
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers  
Enabling FDN  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Additional settings  
numbers  
2. Tap Turn on FDN  
Settings  
My device  
Fixed dialing  
Additional settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Additional settings.  
.
Settings  
My device  
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
2. Tap one of the following options:  
FDN is enabled.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Turn off  
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be  
.
created.  
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Additional settings  
numbers  
2. Tap FDN list  
Settings  
My device  
Fixed dialing  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to  
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.  
.
.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.  
Changing the PIN2 Code  
Ringtones and keypad tones  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Additional settings  
numbers  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
Settings  
My device  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Ringtones and keypad tones  
2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK  
3. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK  
My device  
Fixed dialing  
My device  
Call  
.
.
.
.
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you  
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.  
5. Tap Dialing keypad tone to create a checkmark if you  
want tones to play when the keypad is pressed.  
Managing the FDN List  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to  
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
Personalize call sound  
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear  
during a call with and without earphones.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Increase volume in pocket  
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is  
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its  
location.  
Settings  
My device  
My device Call Personalize call sound.  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Increase volume in pocket to  
create a checkmark and enable the feature.  
Settings  
My device  
2. At the Personalize call sound display, tap one of the  
following options:  
• Adapt sound: allows you to customize your sounds. Follow the  
on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound.  
• Soft sound: plays a softer sound when the other party is in a  
noisy environment.  
Voicemail service  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Call  
Voicemail Service.  
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the  
default.  
• Clear sound: plays a clearer sound when the other party  
sounds unclear or muffled.  
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.  
• Off: turns off your customized call sound and plays the default  
sounds.  
Voicemail settings  
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this  
menu.  
Noise reduction  
This option helps to suppress background noise from your  
side during a call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device Call Voicemail settings.  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Noise reduction to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
Settings  
My device  
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the  
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the  
keypad, then tap OK  
.
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Tap OK  
Sound  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call Sound  
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.  
3. Select a ringtone and tap OK  
Vibrate  
This option allows you select vibration settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
My device Call  
.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable  
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was  
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
Settings ➔  
My device  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Call TTY mode  
2. Tap TTY Full TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark  
will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off.  
Settings  
My device  
.
.
,
Blocking Mode  
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected  
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of  
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.  
My device  
.
2. Tap Vibrate to create a checkmark and activate the  
Vibrate feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Blocking mode  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode  
slider to the right to turn it on  
Settings  
My device  
.
TTY Mode  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,  
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,  
to communicate by telephone.  
.
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon  
appears in the Status bar.  
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please  
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure  
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.  
Changing Your Settings  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features  
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable  
incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and  
timer, Disable LED indicator.  
All incoming calls and notifications will be read out  
automatically.  
3. The following options are available:  
• Incoming call: read out callers’ information when receiving  
incoming calls.  
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.  
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to  
configure the From and To time fields.  
• ChatON: read out callers’ information when receiving incoming  
ChatON messages.  
• Air call-accept: wave your hand over the screen to accept  
incoming calls.  
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are  
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All  
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will  
• Message: read out senders’ information when receiving  
incoming calls.  
then appear in the Allowed contact list  
.
• Alarm: read out alarm information when alarms sound.  
• Schedule: read out scheduled alarm information when alarms  
sound.  
Hands-free Mode  
When Hands-free mode is enabled, incoming calls and  
notifications will be read out automatically.  
4. You can disable Hands-free mode by saying “Hands•  
free mode off” while in S voice, or by accessing the  
Settings menu and sliding the Hands-free mode slider  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Hands-free mode  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Hands-free mode to the  
right to turn it on  
Settings  
My device  
.
to the off position  
panel.  
or by using the Notification  
.
Confirm that the Hands-free mode active icon  
appears in the Status bar.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Power saving mode  
Power saving mode allows you to manage your phone to  
conserve power.  
Accessory Settings  
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when  
using a car or desk dock.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Power saving mode  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving mode to turn  
Power saving mode on  
Settings  
My device  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Accessory  
Settings  
My device  
.
.
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or  
removing the phone from the dock.  
.
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and  
conserve power:  
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock  
speakers when the phone is docked.  
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum  
performance of the CPU.  
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home  
screen whenever the phone is docked.  
5. Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover  
and you want your phone to unlock when you open the  
cover.  
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power  
level.  
Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when  
you tap or touch the screen.  
6. Tap Show in-call screen to automatically turn on your  
screen when you move your device away from your ear  
during a call.  
4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various  
ways to conserve battery power.  
7. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or  
Surround.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
       
• Answering/ending calls: accept incoming calls by pressing  
the home key or end calls using the power key.  
• Easy touch mode: allows you to easily tap the screen to stop  
snooze alarms, calendar events and timers, and accept/reject  
incoming calls.  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play  
• Show shortcut: allow the accessibility shortcut under the  
device options to be used by pressing and holding the power  
key.  
Store and manage their use here.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Accessibility  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
My device  
• Manage accessibility: save and update your accessibility  
settings or share them with another device. You can export your  
settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with  
another device.  
.
• Auto rotate screen: automatically rotate the screen from  
landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone.  
• Screen timeout: timeout the accessibility feature after a  
defined amount of time.  
• TalkBack: activate the TalkBack feature.  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
• Secured lock time: allows you to set the time of inactivity that  
passes before your screen locks. This option only appears if  
you have set your screen lock feature to any option other than  
None or Swipe. For more information, refer to “Screen Lock”  
on page 104.  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
• Speak passwords: reads out password information.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Font size: change the size of the fonts used on the device  
within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal,  
Large, or Huge.  
• Text-to-speech options: allows you to adjust your text-to-  
• Magnification gestures: use exaggerated gestures such as  
triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers  
across the screen.  
• Sound balance: allows you to use the slider to set the Left  
and Right balance when using a stereo device.  
• Mono audio: allows you to enable stereo audio to be  
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a  
single earbud/earphone.  
• Negative colors: reverse the display of on-screen colors from  
White text on a Black background to Black text on a White  
background.  
• Turn off all sounds: allows you to mute every sound made by  
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.  
• Hearing aids: allows you to improve the sound quality of your  
device for use with hearing aids.  
• Color adjustment: allows you to adjust the display colors if  
you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display  
because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the right to  
turn it on  
. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Flash notification: allows you to set your camera light to blink  
whenever you receive a notification.  
• Notification reminder: plays a beep when you have unread  
notifications. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
• Google subtitles (CC): allows you to turn on subtitles when  
using applicable Google apps.  
• Accessibility shortcut: allows you to quickly enable  
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the  
• Samsung subtitles (CC): allows you to turn on subtitles  
when using applicable Samsung apps.  
slider to the right to turn it on  
instructions.  
. Follow the on-screen  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
         
• Assistant menu: allows you to improve the device  
accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide  
Keyboards and Input Methods  
You can change the keyboard used by your device by  
the slider to the right to turn it on  
screen instructions.  
. Follow the on-  
following these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
• Press and hold delay: allows you to select a time interval for  
this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, Long, or Custom.  
• Interaction control: allows you to enable or disable motions  
and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen  
from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to  
My device Language and input  
.
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.  
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.  
3. Tap Set up input methods  
4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you  
would like to configure the settings for.  
.
turn it on  
. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Language and input  
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard  
options.  
5. Based on your selection of input method, the  
appropriate settings will appear and are explained  
below.  
Samsung Keyboard settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.  
Language  
You can change the language used by your device by  
following these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Language and input  
.
Settings  
Language.  
My device  
2. Tap the  
icon next to Samsung keyboard.  
My device Language and input  
3. Set any of the following options:  
2. Tap a language from the list.  
• Input languages settings are used to setup the language you  
will be using for input.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
English(US) is the default language. Whatever language you  
select in the Select input languages option below, will be  
displayed here.  
Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence  
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen  
QWERTY keyboard.  
Select input languages sets the input language. Tap a  
language from the available list. The keyboard is updated to the  
selected language.  
• Keyboard swipe: allows you to combine the Samsung  
keyboard with an additional input method choose from:  
None leaves text input as only via the on-screen keyboard.  
SwiftKey Flow like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by  
sliding your fingers across the on-screen keyboard. This feature  
is optimized for use with the on-screen QWERTY keyboard.  
Cursor control when enabled, allows you to control your  
on-screen cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard.  
• Smart typing settings provide access to additional typing  
settings.  
Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must  
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and  
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the  
slider to the right to turn it on  
.
• Key-tap feedback provides feedback functions to be enabled  
Auto replacement automatically completes or replaces the  
current word with the most probable word match after  
tapping the space bar or entering a punctuation mark. Touch  
such as:  
Sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
Vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).  
Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words.  
Character preview provides an automatic preview of the  
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful  
when multiple characters are available within one key.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
   
• More settings provides access to additional access to more  
settings.  
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to login to your Gmail account so  
your phone can learn your Gmail style.  
Help launches a brief on-screen help tutorial covering the main  
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.  
Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their  
original configuration.  
• Learn from Twitter: allows you to login to your Twitter account  
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.  
• Learn from Messages: allows your device to learn from your  
Messages.  
• Learn from Contacts: allows your device to learn from your  
Contacts.  
Predictive Text Settings  
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.  
• Clear remote data: deletes anonymous data that is stored on  
the personalization server.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Language and input  
.
• Clear personal data: removes all personalized data that you  
have entered.  
2. Tap the  
icon next to Samsung keyboard.  
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Predictive text field, to turn it ON  
4. Tap Predictive text  
5. The following options are available:  
• Privacy policy: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
.
.
Swype Keypad Settings  
• Live word update allows the device to automatically update its  
word database with popular new words every day.  
To configure Swype settings:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
My device  
Language and input  
.
• Personalized data: allows you to use personal language that  
you have added to make your prediction results better.  
• Learn from Facebook: allows you to login to your Facebook  
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.  
2. Tap the  
icon next to Swype  
.
3. Tap Settings on the left side of the screen to alter these  
settings:  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you  
enter text using the keypad.  
• Landscape keyboard: allows you to set the Landscape  
keyboard to Full screen, Mini left, Mini right, or split.  
• Keyboard height: allows you to set the keyboard height in both  
Portrait and Landscape modes.  
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype  
application.  
• Pop-up on keypress: displays the character above the key  
when typing.  
• Word choice list font size: allows you to change the font size  
in the word choice list.  
• Long-press delay: set the time needed to select alternate  
characters.  
5. Tap My Words on the left side of the screen to access  
the following options:  
• Backup & Sync: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary  
and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.  
• Living Language: when enabled, this feature automatically  
updates your Swype dictionary with popular new words.  
• Social integration: allows you to learn information from your  
Facebook, Twitter, and Gmail accounts to help you while using  
Swype.  
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to  
display the complete Swype path.  
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
every sentence.  
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.  
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start  
the next word.  
• Edit my dictionary: allows you to edit your personal Swype  
dictionary.  
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in  
your text string based on your current text entries.  
• Show Voice key: once enabled, displays the Voice icon on  
your Swype keyboard so you can use the Voice input option.  
4. Tap Themes on the left side of the screen to access the  
following options:  
• Clear language data: deletes all of your personal language  
data, including your words.  
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance®  
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by  
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,  
language downloads, and other related features via your  
existing data connection.  
9. Tap Updates on the left side of the screen to download  
any new Swype updates. If an update is available, it  
will display under the updates heading. If no updates  
are displayed, then check back later to see any  
available updates.  
6. Tap Languages on the left side of the screen to activate  
and select the current text input language. Default  
language is English. Touch Download languages, to  
download additional languages.  
Google voice typing settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
7. Tap Gestures on the left side of the screen to view  
helpful information on using gestures while using  
Swype.  
My device  
Language and input  
.
2. Tap the  
icon next to Google voice typing.  
3. The following options are available:  
8. Tap Help on the left side of the screen to see the  
following options:  
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to  
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
language from the list.  
• How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.  
• Show helpful tips: once enabled, displays helpful tips and  
hints as you are using Swype.  
• Block offensive words tap to create a checkmark and enable  
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of  
your voice-input Google typing.  
:
• Version: displays the software version information.  
• Offline speech recognition: Enables voice input while offline.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.  
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine allows you to  
view Open Source Licenses.  
Speech Settings  
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice  
input.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to  
view Open Source Licenses.  
My device  
My device Language and input  
.
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech  
synthesis.  
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output  
always or only when using hands-free.  
5. Scroll down to the General section to access the  
following options:  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
• Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice  
search by saying the word “Google”.  
• Default language status: Displays whether or not the default  
language is supported.  
• Offline speech recognition: Enables voice input while offline.  
• Bluetooth headset: allows you to record audio through a  
Bluetooth headset if available.  
Pointer speed  
This option sets your Pointer speed for your mouse or  
trackpad when you are using a keyboard dock accessory.  
3. Tap Text-to-speech options and select Samsung text-to•  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
My device  
speech engine or Google Text-to-speech Engine  
4. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the  
following settings:  
.
My device Language and input  
.
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go  
faster or to the left to go slower.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
   
3. Tap OK to save your setting.  
• Air jump: move your hand up or down above the sensor to  
jump to the top or bottom of a page or list. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
Motions and Gestures  
The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up  
various Motion activation services. For more information on  
• Air browse: move your hand to the right or left above the  
sensor to move to the previous or next item such as pictures or  
web pages. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
• Air move: use one hand to press and hold an icon then move  
your other hand to the left or to the right above the sensor to  
move the icon to another page. You can also use this feature in  
your calendar to move events to another day. Tap the ON/OFF  
From the Home screen, tap  
My device Motions and gestures  
Air gesture  
Settings  
My device  
.
Air gesture allows you to control your device by performing  
motions above the sensor.  
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Air gesture  
icon  
• Air call-accept: wave your hand above the sensor to accept an  
incoming call. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.  
5. Press Help for additional information.  
Motion  
to turn it on.  
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
at the top of your screen  
to activate Air gesture.  
3. Tap Learn about the sensor and icon to learn more about  
the Air gesture sensor and its location.  
Motion allows you to control your device by performing  
natural movements.  
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Motion  
4. The following Air gesture features are available:  
• Quick glance: when your screen is off, reach towards your  
device and it will display information such as time, date, missed  
calls, incoming messages, and battery strength. Tap the ON/  
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
at the top of your screen  
to activate Motion.  
OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
3. The following options are available:  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently  
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the  
Palm motion  
Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching  
device to your ear. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
your screen with the palm of your hand.  
• Smartalert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and  
notified of you have missed any calls or messages. Tap the ON/  
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Palm  
motion  
.
OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
at the top of your screen  
• Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content  
can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points  
on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom  
to activate Palm motion.  
3. The following options are available:  
• Capture screen: Once enabled, you can capture any  
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single  
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe  
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. Tap  
in or out. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
• Browse an image Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
:
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right  
to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally. Tap the ON/  
the ON/OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen  
video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen  
with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen,  
the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the  
current video or unmuting the current sound. Tap the ON/OFF  
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any  
playing sounds by turning the device display down on a  
surface. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
to turn it on.  
4. Press Help for additional information.  
icon  
to turn it on.  
4. Press  
Help for additional information.  
Changing Your Settings  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Smart screen  
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your  
screen settings to make the screen more responsive and  
easier to use.  
Air view  
With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the  
screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,  
you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your  
calendar to see more details.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Smart screen  
Settings  
My device  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Air view  
Settings  
.
My device  
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the features:  
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
at the top of your screen  
to activate Air view.  
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects  
that your face is watching the screen.  
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to  
create a checkmark and activate the feature.  
• Information preview: allows you to see information previews,  
extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your  
finger over the screen.  
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking  
the orientation of your face and the device.  
• Smart pause: pauses videos when your device detects that  
your head has moved away from the screen.  
• Progress preview: allows you to preview a scene or show  
elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar  
while watching a video.  
• Smart scroll: the screen will scroll depending on the phone’s  
tilt angle once your eyes have been detected. Tap the ON/OFF  
icon  
to turn it on.  
• Speed dial preview: allows you to see the contacts and their  
speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in  
your contacts list.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Webpage magnifier: allows you to see magnified links on  
webpages when you hover your finger over them.  
• Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice  
commands Capture Shoot Smile, or Cheese or record  
videos with the voice command Record video  
• Music: allows you to control your Music app using the voice  
commands Next Previous Play Pause Volume up, and  
Volume down  
,
,
.
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to play sound and  
feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items.  
,
,
,
,
Voice control  
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice  
commands to control your device.  
.
Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My device Voice control  
Settings  
My device  
voice control will not be available.  
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
at the top of your screen  
Add Account  
to activate Voice control.  
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize  
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.  
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to  
create a checkmark and activate the feature.  
Adding an Account  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
• Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the  
Settings ➔  
commands Answer and Reject  
• ChatON: allows you to answer or reject calls using the  
commands Answer and Reject  
• Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the  
commands Stop and Snooze  
.
Accounts  
Add account.  
2. Tap one of the account types.  
.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
       
A green circle will appear next to the account type once  
you have created an account. Your email account will  
also be displayed in the My accounts section of the  
main Accounts menu.  
Synchronizing Accounts  
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account  
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Accounts  
Settings ➔  
.
Removing an Account  
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts  
section.  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
3. Tap the account name.  
4. Tap Sync all to synchronize your account or only tap the  
Sync items that you want to synchronize.  
5. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.  
6. Tap Account settings to access your account settings.  
7. Tap Storage usage to see your storage usage for  
different applications.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Accounts  
Settings ➔  
.
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts  
section.  
3. Tap the account name.  
4. At the bottom of the screen, tap Remove account, then  
tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the  
account and delete all its messages, contacts, and  
other data.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Restore  
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of  
your backed up settings and data will be restored.  
Back up and reset  
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your  
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,  
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accounts Back up and reset  
Settings  
.
Back Up My Data  
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of  
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
your settings and data.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accounts Back up and reset  
Settings  
Factory Data Reset  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings  
.
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
to the factory default settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accounts Back up and reset  
2. Tap Factory data reset  
Settings  
.
.
Backup Account  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accounts Back up and reset  
Settings  
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
.
the reset.  
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account  
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to  
be backed up to the Google server.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
       
• My places: allows you to add location information for your  
Home, Office, and Car.  
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data  
from your phone and internal SD card, including your  
Google account, system and application data and  
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not  
erase current system software, bundled  
Security  
The Security settings allow you to determine the security  
level for your phone.  
applications, and external SD card files such as  
music and photos.  
Encryption  
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone  
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD  
card each time it is connected:  
Location  
The Location settings allow you to set up how the phone will  
determine your location and the sensor settings for your  
phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
Settings  
.
2. You must first set up a screen lock type if you haven’t  
already done so. For more information, refer to “Screen  
Lock” on page 104.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Location  
Settings  
.
2. The menu is separated into various sections:  
• Mode: allows you to choose a location mode. each mode  
enables different technologies and affects both the accuracy of  
the location and battery usage.  
3. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
4. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption  
on SD card data that requires a password be entered  
each time the microSD card is connected.  
• Recent location requests: displays services that have recently  
requested your location information.  
• Location services: allows you to configure your Google  
locations services.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap  
OK  
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
.
Encryption may take an hour or more.  
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change  
Set up/change password  
your SIM PIN code.  
Use this option to set up your password when one is first  
required or change your current password.  
4. Tap Change SIM PIN  
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security Set up/change password  
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm  
Settings  
.
.
.
.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm  
.
Forgotten SIM PIN password  
If you enter the wrong SIM PIN more than 3 times, you will  
need to contact your AT&T Customer Service Representative  
to get the PUK code for your device.  
1. Each time you enter a wrong SIM PIN number the  
phone will display how many attempts you have  
remaining the next time you try and enter the SIM PIN  
number.  
Set up SIM card lock  
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on  
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each  
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also  
change your SIM PIN number.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
Settings  
2. After the third incorrect attempt, SIM is now disabled,  
Enter PUK code to continue. Contact carrier for details  
displays and your SIM card is locked.  
.
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
3. Enter the new PUK code that you received from your  
AT&T Customer Service Representative on the keypad  
that is displayed.  
Device Administrators  
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or  
more administration applications that control your device for  
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of  
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device  
security policies.  
4. Enter a new PIN code on the keypad that is displayed  
and tap OK  
5. Enter the new PIN code again in the Confirm PIN code  
field and tap OK  
.
Some of the features a device administration application  
might control are:  
.
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the  
device is restored to factory settings.  
Note: While your SIM PIN is locked, you will still be able to  
make Emergency calls if necessary.  
Automatically locking the device.  
Make passwords visible  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
Restoring factory settings on the device.  
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration  
touch them while entering passwords.  
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
Settings  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
2. Tap Device administrators  
Settings  
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and  
.
enable or disable the display of password characters.  
.
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If  
no device administrators are listed, you can download  
them from the Play Store.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unknown sources  
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market  
Change security level  
This option allows you to set the security level for your  
applications.  
phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
2. Tap Unknown sources  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
More Security Change security level.  
.
2. Select High or Normal (default).  
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.  
Security policy updates  
When you activate this feature, your phone will automatically  
check for changes to the security policy and download any  
updates to improve security and service.  
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
Settings  
.
Verify apps  
This feature allows you to either block or warn you before  
installing apps that may cause harm to your phone.  
2. Tap Security policy updates to create a checkmark and  
activate the feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
2. Tap Verify apps  
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.  
Settings  
.
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Send security reports  
When you activate this feature, your phone will automatically  
send security reports to Samsung via Wi-Fi for threat  
analysis.  
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Send security reports to create a checkmark and  
activate the feature.  
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap Turn  
off to disable a System certificate or Remove to remove  
a User certificate.  
Storage type  
This option allows you to select where you will back up your  
credentials.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security Storage type  
Settings  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Turn  
off button changes to Turn on, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a  
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently  
.
2. Select the backup storage location for your credentials.  
Trusted Credentials  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.  
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.  
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Trusted credentials  
.
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Install from phone storage  
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.  
Application Manager  
You can download and install applications from Play Store or  
create applications using the Android SDK and install them  
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage  
applications.  
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing  
encrypted certificates to use this feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
Settings  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
.
2. Tap Install from phone storage, then choose a  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
Clear credentials  
Clear stored credentials.  
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
More Application manager  
2. Tap DOWNLOADED SD CARD RUNNING, or ALL to  
Settings ➔  
certificates.  
.
,
,
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Security  
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
Settings  
display memory usage for that category of  
applications.  
.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
 
Downloaded  
SD Card  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your SD card.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
More Application manager  
Settings ➔  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
More Application manager.  
Settings ➔  
.
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the  
downloaded applications on your device.  
2. Tap the SD CARD tab to view a list of all the downloaded  
applications on your device.  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the On SD  
Downloaded tabs, press  
name  
4. To reset your application preferences, press  
Reset app preferences  
Sort by size or Sort by  
card tab, press  
4. To reset your application preferences, press  
Reset app preferences  
Sort by size or Sort by name  
.
.
.
.
Note: When you Reset app preferences, you will not lose any  
app data.  
Note: This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,  
disabled app notifications, default applications for  
5. Tap an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You  
will not lose any app data.  
5. Tap an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running Services  
View and control services running on your device.  
Battery  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
More Application manager  
Settings ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings ➔  
.
More Battery.  
2. Tap the RUNNING tab. All the applications that are  
currently running on the device display.  
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached  
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to  
switch back.  
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
2. Tap one of the listed applications to view how it is  
affecting battery use.  
4. Tap one of the applications to view application  
information.  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
use.  
The following options display:  
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
3. From the upper-right tap  
(Refresh) to update the  
list.  
4. Tap the Show battery percentage check box to have the  
battery percentage displayed on your battery charge  
icon on your status bar.  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
Note: Options vary by application.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
   
Storage  
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD  
card.  
SD card is mounted.  
Date and time  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More Date and time  
Settings  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings ➔  
.
More Storage.The available memory displays under  
the Total space and Available space headings for both  
Device memory and SD card.  
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set  
the date and time.  
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the  
time zone.  
SD card  
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that  
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set  
you can safely remove it, then tap OK  
.
the rest of the options.  
– or –  
1. Tap Format SD card to format your SD card. This will  
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,  
and photos.  
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the  
Month  
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the  
Hour Minute, and PM AM, then tap Set  
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
,
Day, and Year then tap Set.  
2. Tap Format SD card again.  
,
/
.
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press  
to cancel.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected  
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
• Legal information: This option displays information about  
Open source licenses, Google legal information, and License  
settings. This information clearly provides copyright and  
distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms  
of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and  
much more pertinent information as a reference. It also  
provides the registration process for DivX VOD. Read the  
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.  
About Device  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,  
and software build number.  
information and terms, then press  
Settings menu.  
to return to the  
To access phone information:  
• Device name: displays the phone’s model name.  
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.  
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this  
handset.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
More About device  
2. The following information displays:  
Settings  
.
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if  
available. For more information, refer to “Software Update”  
on page 142.  
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on  
this handset.  
• Status: displays the Battery status, Battery level (percentage),  
Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state,  
Roaming status, Mobile network state, the phone number for  
this device (My phone number), IMEI number, IMEISV number,  
IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial  
number, Up time, and Device status.  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this  
handset.  
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
• SE for Android status: displays the Security Enhancement  
status of your device.  
• Secure boot status: displays the status of the Secure boot.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
   
• Security software version: displays the version of the latest  
security software.  
5. When updating software, once the update file is  
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start  
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If  
you want to resume the update before the selected  
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used  
for updates to the handset or support. For additional  
information please contact your AT&T service  
representative.  
time, tap Continue update  
.
Software Update  
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your  
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone  
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically  
updates with the latest available software when you access  
this option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More  
About device  
Software update  
.
2. Tap Check for updates  
.
3. At the AT&T Software update prompt, tap OK to  
continue.  
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if  
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up  
to date prompt is displayed, tap OK  
.
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 8: Connections  
This section describes the various connections your phone  
can make including Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your  
PC.  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning  
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to  
compatible in-range WAPs.  
Wi-Fi  
About Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Wi-Fi  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
Settings  
.
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to  
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local  
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11  
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and  
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can  
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or  
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and  
password).  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
.
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Connections  
Wi-Fi.  
The network names and security settings (Open  
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi  
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.  
Note: When you select an open network, you will be  
automatically connected to the network.  
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
       
Manually add your new network connection  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Connections Wi-Fi  
2. Tap Add Wi-Fi network  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
Connections  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF  
Wi-Fi.  
.
.
3. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your  
Wireless Access Point.  
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and  
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and  
reduce your use times.  
4. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
5. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s  
password.  
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
6. Tap Show advanced options, if you need to add  
advanced options such as Proxy settings, IP settings,  
or Key management.  
Connections  
2. Tap Scan  
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.  
Wi-Fi.  
.
7. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect  
to your target WAP.  
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously  
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not  
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset  
your device back to its factory default settings.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi  
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the  
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a  
right to turn it on  
.
glance:  
• Sort by: allows you to sort by alphabet or RSSI.  
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to  
disconnect from Wi-Fi.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point  
available but you are not connected to it. May also  
display if there is a communication issue with the  
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
• Always allow scanning: allows the Google location service  
and other apps to scan for networks, even when Wi-Fi is turned  
off.  
• Auto network switch: allows the device to automatically  
switch between a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network.  
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an  
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.  
• Install certificates: allows you to install security certificates  
that you have on a MicroSD card.  
Displays when connected to another device using  
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your  
device’s advanced Wi-Fi services.  
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Wi-Fi  
2. Press Advanced  
The following options are available:  
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.  
Settings  
.
.
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
8. Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the top of your screen.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
9. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press  
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi  
Help.  
Direct.  
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections Wi-Fi  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Settings  
.
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct  
button.  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,  
Android_49ba.  
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to  
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,  
may be different.  
4. Tap Done  
.
5. On your phone, tap Scan  
.
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive  
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.  
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been  
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
received. The file can be found in My Files  
All files  
tap on it.  
Device storage in the ShareViaWifi folder.  
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the  
connection to be made.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NFC  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on  
shared folder information may differ.  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use.  
S Beam  
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another  
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.  
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music  
files from your Music app, and more. For more information,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wi-Fi  
AT&T Smart  
.
2. The first time you access AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will  
need to install it. Tap OK at the prompt.  
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
Bluetooth  
About Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and  
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is  
usually up to approximately 30 feet.  
4. The Play Store displays the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
application. Tap Update  
.
5. Tap Accept  
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.  
.
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
       
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Bluetooth Settings  
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of  
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,  
including:  
Settings  
Connections  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
.
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
.
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other  
Bluetooth devices  
When active,  
appears within the Status area.  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Connections  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
Connections  
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON  
3. Tap Bluetooth  
.
.
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF  
.
.
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More  
2. Use the keyboard to modify your device name and tap  
OK  
About device  
Device name.  
Displays when Bluetooth is active.  
.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
To make your device visible:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Visibility time-out  
.
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other  
devices for pairing and communication.  
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility  
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered  
in-range Bluetooth devices.  
to time-out.  
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
To show received files:  
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
5. The external device will then have to also accept the  
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
appears within the Status area.  
.
From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Received files  
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.  
.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search  
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such  
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.  
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations  
may be different, and functions such as transfer or  
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth  
compatible devices.  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth  
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,  
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the  
discovery and authentication process.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
 
Deleting a paired device (unpair)  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time  
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices  
will continue to recognize their partnership and  
exchange information without having to re-enter a  
passcode again.  
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection  
record” and upon reconnection would require that you re•  
enter all the previous pairing information.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap  
next to the  
previously paired device. This opens the connected  
device’s menu options.  
Disconnecting a paired device  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.  
4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device.  
5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the  
paired device.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from  
the paired device.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously  
paired device (from the bottom of the page).  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur  
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of  
your phone or it is powered off.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your  
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,  
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or  
other items using a Bluetooth connection.  
notifications list.  
PC Connections  
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data  
cable using various USB connection modes.  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be  
Storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of  
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your  
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.  
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You  
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download  
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device  
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your  
devices.  
2. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
3. Press Share namecard via  
.
.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via  
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each  
entry you select.  
Mac).  
5. Tap Done  
.
6. Tap Bluetooth  
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and  
communicating for the pairing to be successful.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
     
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have  
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your  
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0  
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your  
computer.  
Connecting as a Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a  
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.  
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the  
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up  
window displays on the PC when connected.  
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files  
.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 9: Applications  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate  
through that particular application. If the application is  
already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
Amazon Kindle  
This application allows you to download books, magazines,  
and newspapers to read on your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon Kindle  
.
2. At the Kindle display, tap Get Kindle for Android  
.
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been  
loaded on your device as of the date of purchase.  
Information concerning third party applications that you  
may choose to download from the Google Play Store or  
otherwise should be obtained from the application  
provider directly and not from Samsung.  
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
application from the Play Store.  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
       
AT&T FamilyMap  
AT&T Locker  
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your  
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient  
place; the AT&T cloud.  
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to  
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless  
phone or PC and know that your family's location information  
is secure and private.  
Note: FamilyMap requires a paid subscription. To sign up for  
service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap for more  
information or contact your AT&T Customer Service  
Representative.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Locker  
.
3. At the AT&T Locker home screen, tap Sign Up to create  
an account or tap Log In if you already have an  
account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T FamilyMap  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.  
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AT&T Mobile Locate  
AT&T Navigator  
With the AT&T Mobile Locate app you can access the Mobile  
Protection Pack and with a paid subscription, replace your  
phone if it is lost or damaged, locate your phone if it is lost,  
and receive backup and phone support.  
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-  
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to  
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local  
searches.  
Important! In order to take advantage of the AT&T Mobile  
Locate application, you must purchase the Mobile  
Protection Pack within 30 days of purchase/  
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
activation of a new device. For more information,  
.
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Navigator  
1. Purchase the application by visiting att.com/mpp  
.
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Mobile Locate  
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap I Accept to  
acknowledge the terms of use.  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Mobile  
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the  
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T  
Navigator main screen displays.  
Locate.  
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to  
purchase.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Applications  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the  
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.  
4. Enter the second number.  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use. For more information,  
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).  
6. To view calculator history, tap  
located at the  
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past  
Beats Music  
calculations is displayed. Tap  
the calculator keypad.  
again to display  
Clear  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Beats Music  
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
7. To clear the calculator history, press  
history  
.
8. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Beats Music.  
display the scientific calculator.  
Calculator  
Calendar  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by  
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act  
as a reminder, if necessary.  
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also  
keeps a history of recent calculations.  
To access the Calendar:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator  
.
Calendar  
.
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric  
2. The following tabs are available on the right side of the  
keys.  
display:  
Year: displays the Year view.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Month: displays the Month view.  
• Week: displays the Week view.  
• Day: displays the Day view.  
Calendar Settings  
1. From any Calendar view, press  
Settings.  
2. Tap View styles and select an option.  
Tap Month view styles and select an option.  
Tap Week view and select a type.  
• List: displays the List view.  
Task: allows you to search for tasks.  
3. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,  
Saturday, Sunday or Monday  
3. Tap  
event.  
(Create event) to create a new Calendar  
.
4. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check  
mark indicates selection.  
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a  
blue box.  
5. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your  
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone  
from within the Select time zone field.  
5. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
• Go to: displays a specific date.  
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,  
or an individual event.  
6. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers  
along the side of the week entries.  
• Delete memo: allows you to delete a memo stored in your  
Calendar memo list.  
7. Tap Weather to have weather symbols displayed on  
your calendar. A check mark indicates selection.  
8. Tap Set alerts and notifications to adjust the event  
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.  
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of  
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has  
been opened.  
notification method. Choose from: Alert  
,
Status bar  
notification, and Off  
.
9. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar  
• Calendars: allows you to view the current Calendar accounts.  
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.  
event notification.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
10. Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to  
vibrate.  
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to  
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data  
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No  
11. Tap Quick responses to select quick responses to  
emailing guests.  
thanks  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google  
Camera  
Chrome.  
Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a  
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take  
Clock  
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the  
World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a timer, and set up your  
desk clock.  
ChatON  
Alarm  
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends  
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video  
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client  
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations  
between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to  
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific  
time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Alarm Create alarm . The following options  
display:  
• Time: tap  
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.  
Clock  
Chrome  
(Up) or  
(Down) to set the new time for the  
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google  
Chrome web browser on your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap  
Accept and Continue  
Chrome  
.
.
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the  
alarm by tapping on the days that you want the alarm to sound.  
Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat  
weekly.  
• Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the best  
time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on  
your bed then the phone's movement sensor (also known as  
accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work from any part of the  
bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap the ON/OFF slider to  
activate.  
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when  
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and  
Briefing).  
• Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The  
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.  
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.  
• Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm  
is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional options.  
• Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.  
• Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds when  
you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the slider to the  
Turning Off an Alarm  
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the  
icon to the right.  
right to turn it on  
then follow the on-screen  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
instructions to enter a location.  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,  
• Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap the  
ON/OFF slider to activate.  
Z
Z
touch and sweep the  
icon to the left. Snooze must  
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
 
Deleting Alarms  
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:  
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,  
then tap DST settings  
6. Select Automatic Off, or 1 hour  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
,
.
Alarm  
Delete.  
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on  
the World Clock listing will appear.  
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green  
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap  
Select all to delete all alarms.  
Deleting a World Clock Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
World Clock Delete  
2. Press and hold the city clocks you wish to delete.  
Clock  
3. Tap Delete  
.
.
World Clock  
3. Tap Delete  
.
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in  
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in  
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around  
the world.  
Stopwatch  
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Clock  
Stopwatch  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
.
World Clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.  
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.  
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want  
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to  
enter a city to search for.  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a  
unit of time per lap.  
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.  
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times  
recorded.  
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will  
display.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Timer  
Desk clock  
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer  
to count down to an event based on a preset time length  
(hours, minutes, and seconds).  
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and  
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,  
and weather conditions when it is docked.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Timer  
Clock  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Desk clock  
The default Desk clock is displayed.  
2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.  
3. To make changes, tap Settings  
Clock  
.
.
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.  
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.  
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap  
different fields, they will become highlighted.  
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.  
.
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen  
mode:  
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the  
timer.  
• Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden  
from view.  
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to  
set the timer back to the original setting.  
• Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,  
Gallery, or Same as home screen.  
• Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap  
to uncheck.  
• Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and  
weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the  
right to turn it on  
.
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
 
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock  
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display,  
Automatic unlock, and Audio output.  
Drive  
With the Google Drive application, everything that you add to  
your Drive from work or home is also available on your  
device. You can create and edit documents on your device  
and the changes are saved everywhere.  
Contacts  
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name  
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can  
be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Drive  
.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with  
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google Drive.  
4. Press  
Help for more information.  
DriveMode  
Downloads  
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current  
downloaded files (Internet and Other).  
With the AT&T DriveMode application, you can set your  
phone to auto reply when you are driving and don’t want to  
answer the phone. You can set auto reply to Messages,  
Emails, and Phone Calls. You can also allow up to five of your  
contacts to contact you while you are in Drive mode.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads  
.
All of your downloads are listed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
DriveMode  
.
2. Tap an available file and select it for use.  
The AT&T DriveMode screen is displayed.  
3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort  
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy and  
by size, or Clear list.  
tap I Accept to continue.  
3. Read the additional information and tap Continue  
.
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your AT&T  
Gallery  
DriveMode options.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to  
Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various  
email services. You can also receive message alerts when  
you receive an important email. For more information, refer  
Gmail  
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured  
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your  
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically  
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more  
Flipboard  
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out  
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,  
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your  
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,  
photos from friends and much more.  
Google  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Flipboard  
.
The Google Search application is the same on-screen  
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on  
your main Home screen. For more information, refer to  
2. Swipe the screen up and select some on-screen  
categories that you are interested in, then follow the  
on-screen instructions to build your flipboard.  
– or –  
Tap Tap to sign in to log into your previously created  
profile.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
             
Google Settings  
Group Play  
As Google has become more intertwined with other  
applications, this menu provides a quick and ready access  
point to configure preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude,  
Locations, etc. You can also use the Search function to  
initiate a Google Search from this menu.  
Group Play allows you to share pictures, music, and  
documents in real-time with your friends. You can create a  
group from your device or join other groups. You can also  
play games with your friends.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. The first time you access Group Play, read the  
Disclaimer and tap Agree  
The Group Play main screen is displayed.  
Creating a group  
If you have media you want to share, create a group.  
Group Play  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Google  
Settings and select an on-screen option.  
.
2. Tap one of the Google Settings options.  
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify your Google  
Settings.  
Google +  
1. From the Group Play main screen, if you want to set a  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer  
group password, tap the Set group password checkbox.  
2. Tap Create group  
.
3. If you selected the Set group password checkbox in  
step 1, enter a group password at the Set group  
password prompt, and tap OK  
.
Mobile AP is enabled.  
4. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and  
play content heading.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. Tap the items you want to share to create a  
checkmark, then tap Done or OK  
Hangouts  
.
Hangouts is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. You can connect with  
your friends across computers and various Android devices.  
You can have conversations or video calls with up to 10  
6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their  
devices and they can view your media using you as a  
Mobile AP.  
7. Press  
Info for information on the device that is  
hosting the Mobile AP.  
Help  
8. Press  
Help for additional information.  
The Help application provides detailed help for using your  
phone and the included features and applications.  
Joining a group  
If you want to see media from your friend’s phone, join a  
group.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Help  
.
2. Tap one of the following for more information:  
• New features: provides help on all of the new features and  
applications such as Motion, Camera, Group Play, Story Album,  
and S Health.  
1. From the Group Play main screen, tap Join group  
.
2. Your phone scans for available groups for you to join.  
3. Tap a group to join.  
You will now be able to see your group’s shared media.  
• Basics: provides basic information on using your device.  
• Applications: provides information on how to use basic  
applications like Contacts, Email, S Memo, Internet, Camera,  
etc.  
4. Press  
Info for information on the device that is  
hosting the Mobile AP.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
     
• Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,  
Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, Air gesture, Air view,  
Smart screen, Motion, Screen Mirroring, and Portable Wi-Fi  
hotspot.  
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across  
a web page.  
4. To return to a previous page, press  
.
5. To move forward to a web page, press  
.
• Online help: provides more detailed online help for additional  
questions you may have.  
Browser Options  
From any web page, press  
to access your browser  
• Available accessories: provides information on accessories  
for your phone that are available for purchase.  
options.  
Enter a URL  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
Internet  
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section  
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to  
the basic features.  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these  
steps:  
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.  
Accessing the Mobile Web  
To access the Browser:  
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.  
From the Home screen, tap Internet  
.
The website displays.  
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.  
Search the Internet  
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these  
steps:  
Navigating with the Browser  
1. To select an item, tap an entry.  
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with  
your finger in an up or down motion.  
1. Tap the Search bar at the top of the browser.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen  
keypad and tap  
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your  
.
device after you exit the incognito mode.  
3. Tap a link to view the website.  
To add a new incognito window:  
1. From your browser, press  
Adding and Deleting Windows  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.  
Incognito mode.  
2. At the information prompt, tap OK  
.
To add a new window, follow these steps:  
1. From your browser, press  
New window.  
3. A new browser window displays.  
A new browser window is opened.  
To exit from the incognito window:  
2
2
1. From your browser window, tap  
(Windows).  
2. Tap  
(Windows) to see thumbnails of all open  
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the  
incognito window. The incognito icon appears in  
windows.  
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.  
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page  
thumbnail to delete the window.  
the upper-left of the new browser window while you  
are in this mode.  
3. Tap  
window.  
next to the incognito listing to delete this  
Going Incognito  
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites  
outside of normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito  
window won’t appear within your browser history or search  
history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on your  
device.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
     
Using Bookmarks  
Editing Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to edit.  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to  
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs  
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in  
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can  
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.  
2. Tap Edit  
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address,  
and Location.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
(Bookmarks).  
4. Tap Save  
.
The Bookmarks page is displayed.  
Deleting Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to delete.  
2. Press  
to display the Bookmark options.  
Adding Bookmarks  
1. From any webpage, tap  
.
2. Tap Delete  
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address,  
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK  
.
and Location.  
3. Tap Save  
.
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the  
page.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Lookout Security  
Maps  
Lookout Security™ provides mobile device-specific security  
features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit.  
Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that  
are unique to the mobile market. Along with the antivirus and  
anti-malware tech, there's a lost and stolen phone locator  
service, an application privacy adviser, and a backup service.  
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and  
satellite maps and local business information, including  
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You  
can also post public messages about a location and track  
your friends.  
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have at least  
an active data connection. The Maps application  
does not cover every country or city.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Lookout Security  
.
2. Read the on-screen information, then tap Get started  
3. Read the on-screen descriptions and activate those  
desired features. Tap Next to progress to the next  
screen.  
.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
4. Tap New user or Existing user  
.
5. Create a Lookout account by entering an email address  
and account password.  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
6. Re-enter the password and tap Start Lookout  
.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
         
Using Maps  
Mobile TV  
Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch  
your favorite TV shows using your handset.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Maps  
.
A map will display with your location in the very center.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Maps  
Note: This feature requires a paid subscription. See your AT&T  
application.  
Customer Service Representative for more information.  
Messages  
1. Tap  
Mobile TV  
.
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and  
voicemail messages together into a single conversation  
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more  
2. Read the 7 day Trial for Mobile TV screen and tap  
Accept & Start Trial to continue or Exit to exit.  
3. The Mobile TV main page displays. Follow the on-  
screen instructions to watch TV.  
Messaging  
You can send and receive different types of messages. For  
Note: Mobile TV will use a large amount of data and you are  
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly  
recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in  
addition to this purchase.  
Mobile Hotspot  
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile  
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Music  
Volume control and SoundAlive.  
Music is an application that can play music files. Music  
supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3,  
WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching Music allows you to  
navigate through your music library, play songs, and create  
playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).  
Volume control showing volume muted.  
Plays the entire song list once.  
Replays the current list when the list ends.  
Repeats the currently playing song.  
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.  
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.  
Lists the current playlist songs.  
Playing Music  
1. Tap  
Music  
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (Songs,  
Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to  
view the available music files.  
Displays the current song in the player window.  
Assign the current song as a Favorite.  
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to  
begin playback.  
Streams the current music file to another device  
via Samsung Link.  
4. The following Music controls are available:  
Pause the song.  
Music Options  
To access additional options, follow these steps:  
1. While in Music, press  
2. The follow options are available before you play music:  
Start the song after pausing.  
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to  
previous song.  
.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to  
go to next song.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
     
Music Settings  
Note: The following options may or may not appear depending  
on whether or not music is actually playing. Also,  
options will be different if the song you are listening to is  
in a playlist.  
The Music Settings menu allows you to set preferences for  
the Music app such as whether you want the music to play in  
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu  
displays.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
3. Select one of the following settings:  
Music  
.
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a  
selected playlist.  
.
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth  
headset.  
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories  
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,  
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,  
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you  
want to display in the Music menu.  
• Delete: deletes the music file.  
• Search: allows you to search your device for a certain song.  
• Scan for nearby devices: allows you to scan for nearby  
devices that you can connect with.  
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,  
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.  
• Settings: allows you to change your Music settings. For more  
information, refer to “Music Settings” on page 172.  
• End: allows you to end the Music app.  
• Adapt Sound: allows you to set Adapt Sound on when your are  
listening with earphones to alert of incoming calls and  
notifications.  
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and  
2.0X using the slider.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn  
off after a set interval.  
Adding Music to a Playlist  
To add files to the playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
• Lyrics: when activated, displays lyrics when available.  
• Smart volume: automatically adjusts each track’s volume to an  
equal level.  
Music  
.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
4. Tap Add music)  
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music  
• Voice control: allows you to use voice commands to control  
the Music app.  
(
.
Using Playlists  
tracks to this playlist then tap Done  
.
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media  
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.  
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music  
options menu or from within a 3rd party music application  
(such as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the  
handset.  
Removing Music from a Playlist  
To remove music files from a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
4. Press Remove  
.
Creating a Playlist  
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music  
.
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove  
.
3. Press  
Create playlist.  
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK  
.
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
         
Editing a Playlist  
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you  
can also rename the playlist.  
Note: If you do not have an external SD card inserted, this  
option will not display. All files shown will be from your  
internal storage.  
To edit a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Playlists  
3. Press  
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.  
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK  
Music  
.
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your  
.
phone is configured.  
Edit title.  
3. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap SD  
memory card to see the contents of your external SD  
card (memory card).  
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see  
myAT&T  
My Files  
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own  
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change  
your rate plan.  
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,  
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in  
one convenient location.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
files  
My Files  
All  
.
The myAT&T page is displayed.  
2. Tap Device storage to see the contents of your internal  
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
SD card.  
3. Enter your User ID and Password using the onscreen  
keypad, then tap Login  
.
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Play Books  
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million  
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the  
eBookstore.  
Optical Reader  
The Optical reader allows you to use your camera to identify  
text and extract useful information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Books  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Optical Reader  
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play  
Books application.  
.
2. Aim the camera at an object containing written words.  
3. Align the on-screen box atop the target text. Once  
detected, the device shows on-screen information  
such as link and descriptions.  
Play Games  
This application takes you directly to the Play Store Games  
area where you can download games.  
Phone  
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer  
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Games  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
Photos  
3. Select an available on-screen option and follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
Google Photos allows you to share you photos more easily  
using the Google+ application.  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Photos  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use G+ Photos.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
             
3. At the Google play screen, tap Add account if you have  
not previously used Play Music, and follow the on-  
screen instructions to create your account and use Play  
Music.  
Play Movies & TV  
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of  
different movies and television shows. You can watch  
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing  
at a later time.  
Play Newsstand  
With Google Play Newsstand, you can subscribe to your  
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your  
phone at any time or any place.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies & TV  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Newsstand  
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and  
viewing movies and TV shows.  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
4. Press  
for additional options.  
Play Music  
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon  
to  
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
copied from your PC.  
browse the full catalog.  
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept  
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view  
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.  
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and  
subscribe.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Music  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a  
POLARIS Office 5  
POLARIS® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or offline. The  
application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document  
Format) files.  
magazine.  
Play Store  
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and  
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to  
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag  
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
POLARIS Office 5  
.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.  
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch  
Register to complete the process.  
– or –  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store  
.
2. Sign in to your Google account.  
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.  
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of  
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or  
Decline to exit.  
The main POLARIS Office 5 screen displays.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use POLARIS  
4. Tap Apps Games, or AT&T to download or purchase  
,
Office 5.  
games or applications. You can also download updates  
to existing applications.  
S Health  
S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better  
manage your health by providing you with relevant  
information.  
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Read the introduction and tap Start  
Applications  
S Health  
.
.
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3. Read the Use of S Health, Connecting Third Party  
Devices and Programs, Information Used, Proprietary  
Rights and Licences, and Disclaimer of Warranty.  
4. Tap the Agree checkbox.  
You should also check with your doctor if you have symptoms  
suggestive of heart, lung, or other serious disease, such as:  
Pain or discomfort in your chest, neck, jaw, or arms during  
physical activity;  
Dizziness or loss of consciousness;  
5. Tap Next  
.
Shortness of breath with mild exertion or at rest, or when lying  
down or going to bed;  
6. Sign in to your Samsung account if you have not  
already done so. For more information, refer to  
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12.  
Ankle swelling, especially at night;  
A heart murmur or a rapid or pronounced heartbeat;  
Muscle pain when walking upstairs or up a hill that goes away  
when you rest.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.  
8. Tap  
Help for more detailed information.  
Before You Start Exercising  
Finally, the American College of Sports Medicine  
recommends that you see your doctor before engaging in  
vigorous exercise if two or more of the following apply:  
This app can be used to monitor your exercise. While  
moderate physical activity, such as brisk walking, is safe for  
most people, health experts suggest that you talk with your  
doctor before you start an exercise program, particularly if  
you have any of the following conditions:  
You are a man older than age 45 or a woman older than age 55;  
You have a family history of heart disease before age 55;  
You smoke or quit smoking in the past six months;  
You have not exercised for three months or more;  
You are overweight or obese;  
Heart disease;  
Asthma or lung disease;  
Diabetes, or liver or kidney disease;  
Arthritis.  
You have high blood pressure or high cholesterol;  
You have impaired glucose tolerance, also called pre-diabetes.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When in Doubt - Check it Out  
Toolbar  
If you are unsure of your health status, have several health  
problems, or are pregnant, you should speak with your  
doctor before starting a new exercise program. Working with  
your doctor ahead of time is a good way to plan an exercise  
program that is right and safe for you. Consider it the first  
step on your path to physical fitness.  
Writing area  
Add Page  
Show/Hide  
Additional  
Options  
S Memo  
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using  
the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice  
recordings, and text all in one place.  
Creating a New Memo  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Memo  
.
Keyboard  
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to  
enter edit mode.  
– or –  
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described  
in the following table:  
Tap  
to start a new memo in text mode with the  
to start a new memo in  
keypad displayed or tap  
Changes the view mode.  
drawing mode using your finger or a compatible  
on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth  
in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.  
Allows you to add free-format drawing.  
Displays the keypad to you can add text.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
     
S Translator  
With the S Translator you can easily translate words and  
phrases into many different languages.  
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.  
Undo the last action.  
1. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not  
Redo the last action that was undone.  
Makeavoicerecordingtoaddtothememo.Thisoption  
is not available in free-format drawing mode.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
S Translator  
.
3. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar  
and enter your language.  
Providesaccesstoaquickselectionbar. Choosefrom:  
Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, and Clip art.  
These elements can be used within the memo.  
4. Tap the language bar at the bottom of the screen to  
select the language that you would like to translate to.  
5. Enter text into the upper box and tap  
Add an additional page to the memo.  
.
It will be translated into the language of the upper box.  
– or –  
3. When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save  
on the top menu bar.  
Enter text into the lower box and tap  
.
4. Press  
to access additional options.  
It will be translated into the language of the lower box.  
6. Tap either of the Speak buttons at the bottom of the  
screen to translate using either language by using your  
voice. The translation will appear automatically in the  
appropriate box.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7. Press  
for additional options.  
9. At the S Voice screen, tap  
or say “Hi Galaxy”  
to wake up S voice.  
S Voice  
10. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen  
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to  
perform operations that you would normally have to do by  
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,  
playing music, etc.  
instructions.  
11. Press  
for additional options.  
Samsung Apps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Voice  
.
With Samsung Apps, you can download hundred of  
applications from a variety of categories.  
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not  
already done so.  
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to  
continue.  
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to  
continue.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Apps  
4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then  
.
tap Next  
5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen,  
then tap Next  
6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen,  
then tap Next  
7. Read the information on the Edit what you said screen,  
then tap Next  
8. Read the information on the Help screen, then tap  
Finish  
.
3. Tap an application that you would like, then tap Free or  
Price (depending on whether it is free or not).  
.
4. Tap Accept and download  
.
The application is downloaded to your device. You can  
find the app icon in your app menu.  
.
5. Press  
Help for additional information.  
.
.
Applications  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account  
Samsung Hub  
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an  
account. Enter the required information.  
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung  
account.  
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase  
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one user-  
friendly location. With hundreds of titles available,  
entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.  
You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch  
from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile  
entertainment.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select  
either Cancel or Connect  
Samsung Hub  
.
.
Note: You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase  
and rent content via Samsung Hub. Samsung Hub usage  
is based on service availability.  
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or  
verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your  
Samsung account to use the application’s various  
features.  
Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE  
connection to preview and download a media file.  
The internal memory acts as a storage location for  
your downloaded rental or purchase.  
Tip: In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your  
Samsung account via the application. Press  
select Sign in  
and then  
.
Note: Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung  
account application. This application manages your user  
profile information.  
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and  
Samsung Hub.  
5. Press  
Help for additional information.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase  
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for  
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by  
clicking the Books link at the top of the page.  
Using Samsung Hub  
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all  
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,  
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently  
added media that you can rent or purchase.  
• GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the  
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new  
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking  
the Games link a the top of the page.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Hub  
.
The Overview screen (landing page) displays an main access  
for all available categories and recently available content for  
purchase or rental.  
3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,  
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to  
the product detail page.  
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following  
available pages:  
• MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/  
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you  
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music  
store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page.  
• VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for  
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you  
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &  
TV store page by clicking the Video link at the top of the page.  
4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,  
rent, or stream the content directly from the product  
detail page.  
5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
 
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
Samsung Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Samsung Hub.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)  
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed  
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the  
service”) that are also registered to the same account.  
You may remove a device from your account no more than once  
every 90 days.  
You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set  
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24  
consecutive hours).  
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content later subject to content re-download availability and  
content provider permissions.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
You may need network coverage to access Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media  
Content.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized  
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.  
Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can  
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;  
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your  
mobile device output.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link  
Samsung Link  
.
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung  
device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs  
on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,  
on-screen monitoring. Samsung Link makes staying  
connected easy.  
2. Tap Sign in to sign into your Samsung Account if you  
have not already done so.  
3. If prompted, read the on-screen message about  
network charges and tap OK to continue and return to  
the main Samsung Link screen.  
Samsung Link allows users to share their in-device media  
content with other external devices using DLNA certified™  
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external  
devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can  
be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.  
4. Tap Get started and follow the on-screen prompts.  
5. Scroll across the application screen to view either  
MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE  
.
6. The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate  
streaming media options:  
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating  
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an  
active/registered Samsung account prior to using  
• Registered devices: allows you to stream/share selected  
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device  
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.  
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media  
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by  
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming  
content.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
 
• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link  
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated  
Samsung account password. Move the slider to the on position  
to activate the feature.  
Configuring Samsung Link Settings  
Samsung Link must first be configured prior to its initial use.  
You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi, Items  
to share, source server address, and external device  
acceptance rights.  
• My account: displays Samsung account information.  
• About this service: displays application information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link  
.
Setting Up Web Storage  
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store  
your files and share them on the “Cloud”.  
2. Press  
and then tap Settings and configure the  
following settings as desired:  
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.  
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able  
to use Samsung Link.  
Note: If you are using another Web storage service, log into  
that service first before using Samsung Link.  
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone  
memory or to an SD card.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link  
.
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images  
from your device to those storage locations specified within the  
Web storage list. Move the slider to the on position to activate  
the feature.  
Note: When adding storage, an N Drive is added.  
2. Tap Add storage and choose from: Box, Dropbox, or  
SkyDrive.  
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for  
streamed video content. Move the slider to the on position to  
activate the feature.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into  
your cloud service.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web  
storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area  
of the main screen.  
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target  
Device  
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are  
5. From the main screen, select a connected device and  
then tap on the media that you would like to share.  
connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
A file with  
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely  
1. Launch Samsung Link on the target device (such as an  
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your  
device to access the file currently stored on your services’  
servers.  
Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link  
.
To de-register Web storage service:  
1. From the Samsung Link application, press  
and  
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before  
you can use this feature.  
then tap Settings  
Registered storage.  
2. Tap  
at the top right corner of your screen, then tap  
next to the web storage service that you want to  
3. Tap your device name from the Registered devices  
area.  
delete.  
3. At the Notification prompt, tap OK  
4. Tap an available category tab (Photos, Music, Video,  
Document, or Files) and select a file.  
.
A file with  
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely  
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your  
device to access the file currently stored on your services’  
servers.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
     
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to  
Story Album  
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your  
story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if  
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.  
place a green check mark alongside it.  
6. Tap  
(Stream to connected devices) and select an  
available target device to begin streaming.  
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the  
on-screen Allow button to continue.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Story Album  
.
2. Read the introductory information and tap Next  
3. Tap Start to begin your Story Album.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
.
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share  
media with the external source.  
5. Press  
Help for additional information.  
8. Confirm  
(
Samsung Link Controller enabled  
)
TripAdvisor  
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.  
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is  
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.  
appears in the Notification area at the top of the device  
to indicate you are using your device as the media  
source.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
TripAdvisor  
.
Settings  
2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not  
already done so.  
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for  
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,  
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.  
4. Press  
for additional options.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Usage Manager  
This app is a shortcut to your Data usage settings so you can  
manage your data.  
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.  
Tap to go to next video.  
Volume control.  
Tap  
Usage Manager  
.
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will  
be played in a small window so you can use  
your phone for other purposes while watching  
the video. Double-tap screen to return to  
previous size.  
Video  
The Video application plays video files stored on your phone  
or microSD card.  
Originalsizeview.Thevideowillbeplayedin  
its original size.  
1. Tap  
Video  
.
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is  
enlarged as much as possible without  
becoming distorted.  
All videos that you have on your phone and memory  
card will be displayed.  
2. Tap the video that you want to play.  
Keep aspect ratio view.  
The video will begin to play.  
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,  
which may cause some minor distortion.  
3. The following video controls are available:  
Pause the video.  
Streams the video to another device via  
Samsung Link.  
Start the video after being paused.  
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to  
go to previous video.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
     
4. Tap List  
to display a list of all your voice  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon  
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the  
icon is tapped.  
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.  
5. On the top right corner of the display, is the recording  
quality icon. Tap to toggle between Normal  
and  
High  
quality recording.  
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,  
6. Press  
for additional options.  
Voice Recorder  
Voice Search  
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to  
one minute long and then immediately share it using Wi-Fi  
Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time  
will vary based on the available memory within the phone.  
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the  
web using only your voice.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Search  
.
2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak  
the word or words that you would like to search for on  
the internet.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice recorder  
.
2. To start recording, tap Record  
microphone.  
and speak into the  
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red  
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words  
that you would like to search for on the internet.  
Results are displayed on your phone.  
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop  
to stop and save the recording or Pause  
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap  
to  
4. The following options are available at the bottom of  
your screen:  
Record  
to resume recording. Once the audio  
recording has stopped, the message is automatically  
saved. Tap Cancel  
without saving.  
• Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the  
original search results.  
to cancel the recording  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Images: Displays images for your search.  
3. Sign into your Google Account if you haven’t already  
• News: Displays news items related to your search.  
• More: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see  
additional options such as Shopping, Videos, Blogs,  
Discussions, Books, and Applications.  
4. The first time you access Isis Wallet, you will be taken  
to the Play Store. Tap Update  
5. Tap Accept & download  
.
.
• Phone: Displays a phone number if applicable.  
6. After the app is downloaded, tap Open to access the  
Wallet  
feature.  
Isis Mobile Wallet uses NFC technology to let you pay for  
purchases with just a tap of your phone. The Wallet holds  
credit, debit, and loyalty cards while organizing offers, deals,  
and promotions. Isis helps you manage your spending by  
showing you card balances and recent purchases for most of  
the cards in your Wallet.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Isis Mobile  
Wallet.  
WatchON  
Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active  
Internet connection available (either mobile  
network or Wi-Fi connection).  
Note: Isis Mobile Wallet requires a special SIM card. See your  
AT&T Customer Service representative for more  
information.  
Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,  
confirm your TV is turned off.  
1. Make sure NFC is activated on your phone. For more  
For more information, refer to www.samsungwatchon.com  
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Wallet  
.
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
       
Initial Configuration  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
Customizing Your Remote  
1. From the top of the main screen, tap  
(Remote  
Control) Continue  
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON  
.
2. From the Select your TV brand screen, tap your TV’s  
Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be  
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile  
network. Click Connect to proceed.  
manufacturer name.  
If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,  
select from one of the following two options. Choose from  
either Show other brands or I have a home projector  
.
3. Select your desired country or region for your TV  
Guide’s source listing.  
3. Aim your device at the TV and tap Power) to  
(
confirm the set up process completed successfully and  
the correct TV IR codes were selected.  
4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code  
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and  
set top box.  
Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10  
5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service  
provider from the available channel listing.  
6. From the Personalize screen, you can either follow the  
on-screen prompts to personalize your desired content  
or tap Skip to continue without customizing your  
content.  
seconds. Please do not press the button again.  
4. If the TV turned on, tap Yes, this code 1 works  
.
– or –  
If the TV did not turn on after tapping  
waiting 10 seconds, tap No, test next code 2 or  
Send this code 1 again  
(Power) and  
7. Read the on-screen Peel Disclaimer agreement and tap  
Agree to complete the set up process.  
.
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. From the Select your channel source screen, select the  
entry that corresponds to your current channel control  
method:  
7. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More info to learn  
how to configure your set top box to receive and  
respond to IR controls.  
• Set-top Box: selected when changing channels is done via a  
receiver box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but  
rather through the receiver/box.  
8. Only after completing the IR setup process and  
programming your box, press  
.
Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time  
process and once successful should not need to be  
repeated.  
• My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV  
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by  
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.  
9. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the  
Note: Try matching your current channel selection method.  
on-screen instructions.  
6. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.  
Using WatchON  
To change channels:  
For example, DirectTV®.  
If your brand does not appear in the list, tap Show other  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
brands and follow the on-screen instructions.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON  
Remote  
.
3. From the top of the main screen, tap  
(
Important! You must configure your set top box for IR  
communication with your device. If you do not  
select More info below and follow the on-screen  
instructions you may not be able to properly use  
the application.  
Control). This launches an on-screen remote control.  
• Easy remote: provides the most common used control  
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
   
4. In a single motion touch and drag up from the bottom-  
right of the screen to access additional remote tabs  
Choose from one of the following:  
For additional information on the WatchON application,  
press and then select Help  
WatchOn Settings  
.
• TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.  
• [Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your  
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control  
functions.  
From the main WatchON screen, press  
and then  
select an available on-screen option:  
• Change room: allows you to select a previously configured  
room.  
5. From the remote screen press  
and then  
• Edit channels: allows you to add or remove channels from  
your custom list. Press and hold a channel number to update  
the channel entry.  
tap Change room) to choose from different  
(
receivers/boxes in different rooms. Ex: Living Room  
box, Bedroom box, etc.  
• Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchON settings  
menu.  
6. Press  
(Back) to return to the main menu.  
Locating your favorite programming:  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap  
View) to reveal available media categories.  
3. Select an available category.  
– or –  
• About: displays on-screen information about the application.  
• Help: displays on-screen help information.  
(Combined  
Tap Channel Guide to display on your TV an on-screen  
listing of available set top box shows.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To add a new room:  
Personalize WatchON  
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from  
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box  
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do  
the same.  
You can personalize your application to do things such as  
show content only from your selected media categories, or  
add an additional room’s set top box.  
To configure your Just for you settings:  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
The Just for you option displays available content matching  
your activated media categories. These categories can be  
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap the On TV tab  
3. Press  
and then select Settings  
Add room.  
4. Name the new room and tap Next  
.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap  
View) Just for you  
3. From the On TV tab, press  
Settings  
4. Access parameters such as Basic profile  
(Combined  
5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code  
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and  
set top box.  
.
and then select  
.
Follow the steps from page 192 to complete the process.  
,
Genres and  
Sports to then configure and enable those parameters  
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
     
YouTube  
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view  
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access  
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can  
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide  
variety of user-generated video content, including movie  
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content  
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other  
original videos.  
additional options, tap Sign in at the top left corner, enter  
your YouTube or Google username and password, and  
tap Sign in  
.
YP  
The YP (Yellowpages) application provides quick and ready  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your  
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your  
search in real-time.  
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended  
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional  
data charges.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube  
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,  
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the  
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play  
Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the  
on-screen instructions. For more information, refer to  
scroll down to browse through the main page  
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional  
options.  
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or  
tap the title link.  
4. Press  
for additional options.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YP  
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
3. The first time you access YP, tap Take a Tour! to learn  
more about the YP app, or tap Skip  
4. Sign in using an email account or your Facebook  
account or tap Skip to Home  
.
.
5. Tap the What do you want to find? field to start a  
search.  
6. Results will be displayed.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the YP app.  
8. Tap  
to display additional options.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
Section 10: Health and Safety Information  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi  
mode in the  
2.4 and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices  
operating within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors,  
not outside, in order to avoid interference with Mobile  
Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this device is restricted  
from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies  
between 5.15-5.25 GHz.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”  
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this  
information before using your mobile device  
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international  
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/  
view.php?ID=39.  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on  
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to  
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect  
the public.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
 
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone.  
Children and Cell Phones  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
Studies have shown that these products generally do not  
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called  
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.  
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,  
leading to an increase in RF absorption.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure  
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
   
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. This mobile phone has a FCC ID  
number: A3LSGHI337 [Model Number: SGH-i337] and the  
specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its  
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple  
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach  
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base  
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.  
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/  
The SAR information for this device can also be found on  
Samsung’s website: http://www.samsung.com/sar  
.
.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be  
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the  
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to  
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have  
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the  
instructions on the website and it should provide values for  
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional  
SAR information can also be obtained at  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,  
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not  
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each  
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at  
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For  
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory  
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.  
.
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Commercial Mobile Alerting System  
(CMAS)  
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts  
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";  
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting  
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to  
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the  
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's  
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be  
available. For more information, please contact your wireless  
provider.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
           
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone  
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
Use a hands-free device;  
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the  
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.  
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.  
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate  
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety  
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked  
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear  
to be working properly.  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Battery Use and Safety  
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or  
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper  
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the  
continued use of damaged batteries.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery  
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair  
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in  
high temperatures.  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise  
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high  
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an  
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
   
Caution: Some applications or prolonged usage may increase  
device temperature. Prolonged skin contact with a device that is  
hot to the touch may produce skin discomfort or redness, or low-  
temperature burns. If the device feels hot to the touch,  
discontinue use and close all applications or turn off the device  
until it cools. Always ensure that the phone has adequate  
ventilation and air flow. Covering the device with bedding, your  
body, thick clothing or any other materials that significantly affect  
air flow may affect the performance of the phone and poses a  
possible risk of fire or explosion, which could lead to serious  
bodily injuries or damage to property.  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,  
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +  
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for  
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.  
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the  
object causing the short-circuiting.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your phone.  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone  
or the battery may explode when overheated.  
WARNING!  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For  
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized  
service center.  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
.
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the  
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause  
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the  
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way  
.
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers  
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with  
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling  
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.  
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or  
.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung  
mobile device by working with respected take-back  
companies in every state in the country.  
Drop It Off  
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about  
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact  
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device  
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous  
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these  
locations may be found at:  
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and  
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment  
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to  
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious  
.
hazard  
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted  
at these locations for no fee.  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations  
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional  
information regarding specific locations may be found at:  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
.
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
   
Mail It In  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL  
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide  
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.  
Just go to  
.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved  
recycler.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile  
devices and batteries  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance  
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these  
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help  
us protect the environment - recycle!  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
explode.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Display / Touch-Screen  
GPS  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS  
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are  
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the  
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio  
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance  
of location-based technology on your mobile device.  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of  
your ability; and  
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency  
responder instructs you.  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Navigation  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
       
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location  
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well  
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee  
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.  
4. Tap the  
key.  
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you  
may first need to deactivate those features before you can  
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your  
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency  
call, remember to give all the necessary information as  
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device  
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an  
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do  
so.  
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless  
mobile device for essential communications (medical  
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or  
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of  
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to  
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be  
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal  
strength.  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or  
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service  
providers.  
Care and Maintenance  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
. The dialer is  
displayed.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
Shock or vibration  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not  
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or  
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and  
could cause a fire or explosion.  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so  
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the  
mobile device.  
Responsible Listening  
Extreme heat or cold  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged  
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific  
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as  
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume  
settings for long durations may lead to permanent  
noise-induced hearing loss.  
Microwaves  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
   
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,  
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
Internet:  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
Internet:  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Operating Environment  
Internet:  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
   
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
.
Other Medical Devices  
Implantable Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Persons who have such devices:  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Posted Facilities  
When your Device is Wet  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has  
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices  
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive  
hearing devices.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices  
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile  
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining  
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the  
amount of interference they generate.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating  
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device  
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
   
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.  
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or  
a label located on the box.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you  
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device  
is relatively immune to interference noise.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending  
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing  
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not  
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out  
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to  
evaluate it for your personal needs.  
Under the current industry standard, American National  
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to  
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a  
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless  
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two  
values equals M5.  
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet  
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference  
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.  
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to  
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not  
operate in telecoil mode.  
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user  
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the  
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would  
indicate excellent performance.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to  
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in  
telecoil mode.  
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be  
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of  
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you  
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult  
your service provider or phone retailer.  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
M2  
= 5  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in  
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19  
standard.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
FCC Notice  
HAC for Newer Technologies  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated.  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing  
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.  
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies  
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with  
hearing aids.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved by Samsung could void your warranty for  
this equipment and void your authority to operate this  
It is important to try the different features of this phone  
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid  
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
       
equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and  
chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be  
dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said  
accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex  
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,  
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
Other Important Safety Information  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or  
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service  
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to  
the device.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in  
your vehicle are securely mounted.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
Section 11: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and  
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Device  
1 Year  
1 Year  
90 Days  
1 Year  
Battery(ies)*  
Case/Pouch/Holster*  
Other Device  
Accessories*  
*If applicable.  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the  
Product.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for  
which it is specified.  
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original  
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All  
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to  
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or  
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must  
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in  
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the  
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller’s name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new  
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may  
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new  
Product.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of  
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for  
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be  
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.  
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be  
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/  
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER  
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO  
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF  
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF  
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,  
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR  
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS  
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
Severability  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its  
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED  
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU  
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR  
THE SOFTWARE.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following  
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions  
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run  
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other  
permanent storage media of one computer and use the  
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,  
and you may not make the Software available over a network  
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same  
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine  
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the  
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary  
notices contained on the original.  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by  
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party  
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which  
includes computer software and may include associated  
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic  
documentation in connection with your use of this device  
("Software").  
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source  
licenses. The open source license provisions may override  
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable  
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices  
section of the Settings menu of your device.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
 
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.  
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual  
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the  
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the  
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this  
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all  
times your information will be treated in accordance with  
Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:  
.
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or  
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and  
add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug  
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,  
and updates and enhancements to any software previously  
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively  
“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the  
Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance  
your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to  
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may  
provide to you or make available to you after the date you  
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide  
other terms along with such Update. To use Software  
provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the  
Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.  
After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that  
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated  
Software version may add new functions and, in some  
limited cases, may delete existing functions.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its  
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered  
as part of the product support services related to the  
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s  
unique identification number), device number, model name,  
customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW  
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network  
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information  
solely to improve their products or to provide customized  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited  
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by  
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be  
governed by your contractual relationship with your network  
carrier.  
network, which may result in additional charges depending  
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some  
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability  
and performance of your device hardware or data access.  
7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the  
default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),  
your device downloads some Updates automatically from  
time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent  
before installing any Update If you choose to disable the  
“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the  
availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check  
Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check  
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of  
your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for  
the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi  
Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you  
choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates  
only through Wi-Fi connection.)  
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the  
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.  
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to  
have access to the internet and may be subject to  
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.  
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi  
connection, the Software will access through your mobile  
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this  
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all  
copies, full or partial, of the Software.  
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER  
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING  
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY  
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.  
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED  
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY  
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party  
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED  
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER  
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations  
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung  
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and  
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of  
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any  
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials  
on or available from such applications. You expressly  
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is  
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory  
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up  
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select  
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,  
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,  
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,  
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its  
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be  
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN  
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND  
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,  
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY  
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON  
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER  
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,  
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or  
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile  
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or  
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party  
content, products, or services available on or through any  
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of  
any third-party application is governed by such third party  
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,  
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any  
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly  
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will  
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy  
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR  
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION  
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY  
membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your  
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung  
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are  
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require  
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and  
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that  
your use of such applications and services will be subject to  
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.  
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE  
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS  
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,  
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN  
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE  
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,  
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF  
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE  
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR  
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL  
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH  
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications  
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this  
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL  
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF  
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON  
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR  
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON  
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS  
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID  
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS  
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,  
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of  
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without  
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be  
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the  
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is  
expressly excluded.  
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION  
.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or  
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of  
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the  
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction  
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,  
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent  
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.  
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,  
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT  
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY  
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only  
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted  
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions  
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to  
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.  
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG  
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE  
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH  
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR  
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or  
consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or  
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed  
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to  
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to  
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,  
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.  
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any  
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also  
applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,  
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from  
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this  
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung  
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first  
consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to  
[email protected], with the subject line: "Arbitration  
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your  
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was  
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and  
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you  
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which  
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of  
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;  
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes  
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator  
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this  
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small  
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your  
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as  
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney  
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that  
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,  
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total  
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such  
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the  
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator  
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling  
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the  
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the  
device and providing the same information. These are the  
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of  
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute  
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or  
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of this license.  
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the  
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral  
or written communications, proposals and representations  
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter  
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to  
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions  
shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 12: Samsung Product Registration  
Samsung Product Registration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
 
Index  
Managing Address Book Contacts  
Service Dialing Numbers 67  
Using Contacts List 58  
Address Book Options 61  
Adobe PDF 177  
Air Gesture  
Activate 23  
Quick Glance 24  
Air gesture 126  
AT&T DriveMode 162  
AT&T FamilyMap 154  
AT&T Locker 154  
AT&T Messages 92  
AT&T Mobile Locate 155  
AT&T Navigator 155  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 147  
Audio Output 110  
B
Back key 22  
Backing up your data 131  
Battery  
charging 9  
Display Percentage 11  
Installing 7  
Low Battery Indicator 11  
Battery Use & Safety 207  
Bigger Font  
A
Abc mode 39  
About Device 141  
Accounts 129  
Add accounts 129  
Adding a New Contact  
Idle Screen 56  
Address Book 55  
Adding a New Contact 56  
Adding Pauses to Contact  
Numbers 57  
Copying a contact to the Phone 66  
Copying Contacts to Phone 66  
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 65  
Deleting Address Book Entries 66  
Deleting Contacts from SIM card  
Dialing a Number 58  
Favorites 64  
Finding an Address Book Entry 58  
Group Settings 63  
Air view 128  
Airplane mode 98, 108  
Alarm 158  
Amazon Kindle 153  
Android Beam 103  
Applications  
Using the Camcorder 75  
Using the Camera 68  
World Clock 160  
Applications settings  
managing 138  
running services 139  
Setting 119  
Blocking Mode 115  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth  
Outgoing Headset Condition 112  
Sending contacts 151  
Books  
Play Books 175  
Box 186  
Bubble  
Options 84  
Ending a Call 44  
International Call 43  
Making a Call 43  
Manual Pause Dialing 43  
Options During a Call 49  
Putting a Call on Hold 51  
Saving a recent call number to  
Address Book 47  
Settings 71  
Taking Pictures 68  
Care and Maintenance 212  
Changing Your Settings 94  
Charging battery 9  
ChatON 93  
Children and Cell Phones 202  
Clock 158  
Searching for a Number in  
Address Book 54  
Using the Speakerphone 53  
Call rejection 110  
Call Sound  
Adding More Volume 49  
Personalize 50  
Camcorder 75  
Commercial Mobile Alerting System  
(CMAS) 88, 205  
C
Calculator 156  
Calendar 156  
Contacts 55  
Creating a Playlist 173  
D
Deregister  
Web Storage 187  
Dialing Options 46  
Display  
Call Functions 43  
3-WayCalling(Multi-PartyCalling)  
Address Book 45  
Adjusting the Call Volume 49  
Answering a Call 46  
Call Back Missed Call 47  
Call Duration 49  
Call forwarding 54  
Call Log 47  
Settings 71  
Shooting Video 75  
Camcorder Options  
Camcorder Options after a Video is  
Taken 75  
Camera 68  
Modes 70  
icons 18  
Using Negative Colors 119  
Display / Touch-Screen 211  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Downloads 162  
Draft Messages 81  
Call waiting 54  
Correcting the Number 44  
Dialing a Recent Number 44  
Quick Settings 71  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive 162  
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 39  
Exercising  
Before You Start 178  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 198  
Gmail 90  
Personalize Swype 124  
Google  
Settings 164  
Google Chrome 158  
Google Maps 169  
Google Voice Typing 41  
Google voice typing settings 124  
Google+  
Settings 164  
GPS 211  
Group  
Adding a contact 63  
Editing 64  
Dropbox 186  
Dual Camera 69  
Dual View 69  
E
Extra Volume 49  
Editing a Picture 73  
Email 88  
Creating a Corporate Email  
Account 89  
Creating Additional Email  
Accounts 90  
Switching Between Email  
Accounts 90  
Emergency alert settings 87  
Emergency Alerts (CMAS) 88  
Emergency Calls 212  
Making 44  
With SIM 45  
Without SIM 44  
F
Family Map 154  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 217  
FCC Notice and Cautions 219  
Featured Apps 163  
Flipboard 163  
Font Size  
Changing 119  
G
Gallery 76  
viewing pictures 76  
viewing videos 76  
Gestures 126  
Removing a contact 63  
Group Settings  
Editing a Caller Group 64  
H
Hands-free Mode 116  
Handwriting feature 40  
Hangouts 165  
Health and Safety Information 198  
Home key 22  
Entering Text  
Changing the Text Entry Mode 39  
Using 123Sym Mode 39  
Using Abc Mode 39  
Using Swype 41  
Overview 23  
Getting Started 6  
Setting Up Your Phone 6  
Voice mail 13  
Home screen mode 110  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hotspots 97, 99, 100, 101  
Linking Contacts 59  
Location 132  
Location services settings 104  
Lock Screen  
Say Wake-Up Command 105  
Shortcuts 105  
Lookout Security 169  
M
Maps 169  
Memory Card 36  
Memory Card Installation 8  
Menu  
key 22  
Menu Navigation 22  
Message  
Register a Number as Spam 84  
Thread Options 84  
Message Options 81  
Message Search 85  
Messaging  
Adding a Signature 87  
Block Unknown Senders 87  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 80  
Deleting a message 84  
Draft 81  
Gmail 90  
Handwriting 40  
Locked 81  
Options 81  
Scheduled Messages 81  
Settings 85  
Signing into Email 88  
Signing into Gmail 90  
Spam 81  
Translate Text 82  
Types of Messages 79  
microSD card 8, 36  
Installing 8  
I
Icons  
Indicator 18  
Icons, description 18  
In-Call Options 50  
Incognito 167  
Create Window 167  
Exit Window 167  
International Call 43  
Internet 166  
K
Keyboard Input Methods 120  
Keyboard settings 120  
Keypad  
Changing Text Input 39  
Kies via Wi-Fi 100  
Kindle 153  
Removing 8  
microSDHC card 8, 36  
Mobile Hotspot 100  
Mobile TV 170  
Mobile Web 166  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 166  
L
Landscape 38  
Language and input 120  
Language and keyboard settings  
select locale 120  
Using Bookmarks 168  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mono  
Audio Setup 119  
Motion 126  
Activate 24  
Overview 23  
Motions 126  
Movies 76  
Multi Window  
Activate/Deactivate 26  
Close App 31  
Customizing 28  
Increase App Window Size 31  
Panel Relocation 27  
Rearrange Apps 28  
Removing Apps 28  
Restoring Apps 29  
Running Multiple Apps 29  
Tab Repositioning 27  
Using 26  
Multimedia 68  
Music 171  
Music Options 171  
Music Player  
creating a playlist 173  
playlists 173  
removing music 173  
settings 172  
P
Palm Motion  
Activate 24  
Mute 50, 53  
PC Connections 151  
Personal Localized Alerting Network  
(PLAN) 88, 205  
Phone  
My Files 174  
myAT&T 174  
N
Navigation 175  
command keys 22  
context-sensitive menus 22  
terms used 22  
touch gestures 22  
Navigator 155  
Nearby devices 103  
Negative Colors 119  
NFC  
Front View 15  
icons 18  
Rear View 17  
Side View 16  
Switching On/Off 11  
Photo  
Editing 73  
Picture  
Color Correction 74  
Frame 74  
Noise Reduction 51  
Pictures 76  
Gallery 76  
Sharing 77  
Places 175  
O
Operating Environment 215  
Optical Reader 175  
Other Important Safety Information  
Play Books 175  
Play Movies & TV 76, 176  
adding music 173  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Play Music 176  
Play Newsstand 176  
Play Store 177  
Pointer speed 125  
POLARIS Office 5 177  
POLARIS® Office 5 177  
Power Saving Mode 117  
Powering  
Off 11  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 131  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 219  
S
S Beam 103  
Sharing Multiple Pictures 78  
Sharing Pictures 77  
S Memo 179  
Creating a New Memo 179  
S Translator 180  
S Voice 181  
Set Wake-Up Command 105  
Samsung Hub  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy•  
cling 209  
scientific calculator 156  
SD Card 37  
Security 131, 132  
Security settings  
device administration 134  
trusted credentials 136  
Service Dialing Numbers 67  
Settings 71, 94  
SIM card  
installation 7  
Installing 6  
SkyDrive 186  
Q
QWERTY keypad 38  
Creating a New Account 182  
Using 183  
Smart Practices While Driving 205  
Smart screen 128  
Smart Switch 14  
Smart Wi-Fi 147  
Snooze 159  
Software Update 142  
Spam  
Add Number 82, 84  
Block Unknown Senders 87  
Settings 87  
R
Red Eye  
Correction 74  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 201  
Reject list 48  
Samsung Keyboard  
Keyboard Swipe 121  
Reset Settings 122  
Samsung Link 154  
Deregister Storage 187  
Sharing Media 187  
Web Storage Setup 186  
Samsung Link Settings 186  
Reset  
factory data 131  
Responsible Listening 213  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spam Messages  
Assigning 81  
Methods 38  
numeric mode 39  
symbol mode 39  
USB Tethering 100  
Using Favorites  
Adding Favorites 168  
Deleting a Favorite 168  
Editing Favorites 168  
Speakerphone Key 53  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi•  
fication Information 203  
Standard Limited Warranty 222  
Stopwatch 160  
Swap 51  
SwiftKeyFlow  
Samsung Keyboard 121  
SWYPE  
entering text using 41  
Swype  
Timer 161  
Automatic Answering 112  
Touch Screen 12  
Lock/Unlock 12  
Transferring Large Files 77  
Translate 82  
TranslateMessage Bubble 84  
Translator 180  
Travel Charger 9  
Using 10  
V
Video 189  
Video player 189  
Voice control 129  
Voice Mail  
Accessing 13  
From Another Phone 13  
Setup 13  
Voice Recorder 190  
Volume 108  
W
Wallet 191  
Warranty Information 222  
WatchON 191  
Cellular Data 124  
TTY Mode 115  
Swype Keypad Settings 122  
Swype Settings 42  
Symbol/Numeric mode 39  
Synchronization settings  
auto-sync 104  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 210  
Understanding Your Phone 14  
Features of Your Phone 14  
Front View 15  
Rear View 17  
Side Views 16  
Unmute 50  
USB settings  
Synchronizing Accounts 130  
Adding a New Room 195  
Changing Channels 193  
Configure Just For You 195  
Customizing Your Remote 192  
Initial Configuration 192  
T
Tethering 100  
Text Input  
Abc mode 39  
mass storage device 152  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locating Programs 194  
Personalize 195  
Settings 194  
Using 193  
Web 166  
Wi-Fi 143  
Wi-Fi Direct 95, 146  
Wi-Fi Settings 95  
World Clock  
Deleting an Entry 160  
World clock 160  
Y
YouTube 196  
YP (Yellowpages mobile) 196  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

RCA DVD Player RTD615i User Guide
Roland DJ Equipment M 48 User Guide
Roland Music Mixer MV 8800 User Guide
Roland Printer M PX 60 User Guide
Rosewill Switch RFS 105 User Guide
Rotel DVD Player RDV 1050 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven CE2913 User Guide
Scion Lawn Mower Accessory 2006 tC User Guide
Sears Portable Generator S2800 User Guide
Sennheiser Headphones HDI 302 User Guide